JP7115512B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, a control device having a CPU and ROM, or having a CPU, ROM, etc. integrated into one chip is provided. ), and a configuration is known in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker (see Patent Document 1, for example).

The control device reads data that determines the content of the performance, and controls execution of the performance by executing processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, the control device reads out data corresponding to the contents of the effect to be executed, and uses the read data to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. , a configuration for controlling the display effects. In addition, in light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed is read in the control device, and the read data is used to cause the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined pattern, thereby performing the light emitting effect. A control configuration is conceivable. In addition, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and the read data is used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker. A control configuration is conceivable.

JP 2011-110091 A

Here, in a game machine such as the one illustrated above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing an effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing effects.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a light emitting means capable of executing an effect using light,
information setting means for setting light emission pattern information used for executing an effect in the light emitting means so that it can be used when performing execution control of the effect of the light emitting means;
an execution means for causing the light emitting means to perform an effect during a predetermined period by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the light emission pattern information when the control execution timing comes;
a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of original information used for setting the light emission pattern information;
The information setting means
original information reading means for reading out predetermined original information from the storage means;
deriving means for deriving the light emission pattern information by applying setting information to the predetermined original information read by the original information reading means;
with
The predetermined original information includes:
execution order information corresponding to the execution order of the effects in the light emitting means;
correspondence information set in correspondence with the execution order information and used by the execution means for controlling the execution of the performance of the light emission means;
is set and
a plurality of pieces of specific information including first information and second information are set in a predetermined order in the execution order information;
At the next control execution timing with respect to the control execution timing at which the light emitting means executes an effect using the correspondence information corresponding to the specific information set in the last order, the execution means , wherein the corresponding information corresponding to the specific information set in the first order is used to execute an effect by the light emitting means,
The derivation means is
By applying the first setting information as the setting information, the effect in the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the predetermined original information in correspondence with the first information. means for deriving the light emission pattern information to be different;
By applying the second setting information as the setting information, the effect in the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the correspondence information set in the predetermined original information in association with the second information. means for deriving the light emission pattern information to be different;
with
The information used for controlling the light emitting means includes information that is to be used with priority over the light emission pattern information derived based on the predetermined original information ,
a plurality of pieces of the predetermined original information used for the predetermined light emitting means;
The light emission pattern information to be used for light emission control by the first light emission means and the second light emission means of the light emission means in a predetermined period is derived using the different original information. and

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform an effect.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of a game board for explaining the curtain plate movable unit and the disk movable unit. (a) to (e) are schematic diagrams for explaining the operation of the movable panel. (a) to (e) are schematic diagrams for explaining the operation of the disk movable object. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process executed in the main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing master side command handling processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the display-side MPU; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when a high-probability jackpot result is obtained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing another handling process executed by the display-side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by the display-side MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command setting processing executed by the display-side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing display-side command handling processing executed by the sound and light MPU; 10 is a flow chart showing operation system corresponding processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the content of communication between the sound/light-side MPU and the display-side MPU when an operation effect is executed; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a light emission data group, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a light emission data area. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the palette data group, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the start position data group, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the list data group, ( d) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a group data group. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data selection table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing light emission data reading processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing data expansion processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of light emission data; 4 is a flowchart showing light emission control processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; 4 is a timing chart for explaining how light emission control is performed; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a sound output data group, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a sound output data area. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing sound output data read processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing sound output control processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing of a movable object effect executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing movable object control processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing first-stage control processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second stage control process executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pair waiting control processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a third stage control process executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing return control processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining how the third stage effect is performed. 4 is a flow chart showing a single control process executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how a disc effect is performed by single control; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing synchronization control processing executed by the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing for rotation stop executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing recovery processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a rotation stopping process executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining problems when the adjustment process for rotation stop and the process associated therewith are not executed; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how a disc effect is performed by synchronous control processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining operation details when a limit range and a stop instruction command are received within the limit range; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the sensor monitoring process performed by sound light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a movable object data area. 4 is a flowchart showing synchronization control processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing pair waiting control processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the third embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing display-side command handling processing executed by the sound and light MPU;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. Although a detailed description is omitted, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame rotatably supported by the outer frame 11, and an inner frame arranged in front of the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. In addition, the game machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the game machine body 12 cannot be opened. , has a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is mounted on the game machine body 12 . The configuration of the game board 20 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20. FIG.

The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a special electric winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a special figure display portion 33, a normal figure display portion 34, etc. ing. When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 27.例文帳に追加The game board 20 is also provided with a large number of nails 28 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry of a game ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being ejected from the game area later. However, in the following explanation, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out port 27, the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25 The entry of a game ball is also expressed as winning.

The upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 20 . Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, the two working ports 23 and 24 are arranged vertically so that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 24a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the universal electric role 24a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation port 24, and when the universal electric role 24a is opened, the prize can be entered into the lower operation port 24.例文帳に追加

The special electric prize winning device 22 has a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 20, and has an opening/closing door 22a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 22a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 22a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big hit results. Note that winning is not impossible in the closed state, but a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state may be employed.

The special figure display unit 33 and the normal figure display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the special figure display unit 33, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 The results of the internal lottery conducted based on the above are clearly indicated by the display. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, winning to the upper working port 23 and winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery. The result of the selected internal lottery is clearly displayed in the special figure display part 33 which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the special figure display unit 33 gives a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In addition, the special figure display unit 33 is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT, dot matrix and other types of display devices. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the special figure display unit 33, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the general pattern display unit 34, the winning of the through gate 25 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed. specified by When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the general electricity open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the normal diagram display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the mains open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessories 24a provided in the lower operation opening 24 are opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a pattern display device 31 for variably displaying a pattern, which is one type of pattern. A center frame 32 is arranged in the variable display unit 26 so as to surround the pattern display device 31 . The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game balls are prevented from falling in front of the display surface G of the pattern display device 31, and the configuration is such that the visibility of the display surface G is not lowered due to the falling of the game balls. ing. Further, the center frame 32 is provided with a stage portion 32a on which a game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. A game ball entered into an entrance formed on the left side of the center frame 32 is supplied to the stage section 32a by passing through a lead-out passage formed on the left side. A game ball falling downward from a position near the center of the stage portion 32 a easily enters the upper working opening 23 .

The pattern display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. - 特許庁That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 33, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the pattern display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 31, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the display surface G is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It's like In addition, as shown in FIG. 4A, five effective lines are set on the display surface G, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. . Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a result of the big win.

Note that the pattern display device 31 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 31 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 23 and 24, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 33, a special figure reservation light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The number of winning game balls in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is reserved up to four pieces, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation light emitting part 35. - 特許庁In addition, at a position adjacent to the normal map display unit 34, a normal map holding light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the normal map display unit 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the normal pattern reservation light emitting part 36. - 特許庁It should be noted that the functions of the holding light emitting units 35 and 36 may be realized by display in a part of the pattern display device 31 .

Here, the variable display unit 26 includes, in addition to the pattern display device 31, a panel movable unit 51 and a pair of left and right disk movable units as a plurality of output devices used for executing effects and notifications. 61a and 61b, a first light emitting section group 71, a second light emitting section group 72, and a third light emitting section group 73 are provided. The curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disc movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the game board 20 for explaining the panel movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b.

A curtain plate movable unit 51 is arranged in front of the display surface G of the pattern display device 31, covers a part of the display surface G from the front, and is provided so that the covered area is variable. and a plurality of panel driving units 53 a and 53 b for displacing the panel movable object 52 . The movable panel 52 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction.

A left side panel drive unit 53a is provided as part of the plurality of panel drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the left end than the central position in the longitudinal direction of the panel movable object 52. In addition, a right side panel drive unit 53b is provided as the remainder of the plurality of panel drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the right end than the longitudinal central position of the panel panel movable member 52. there is That is, a pair of left and right curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b are provided as the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b.

The left panel driving unit 53a and the right panel driving unit 53b have the same configuration. Specifically, each of the panel drive units 53a and 53b includes panel rails 54a and 54b extending in the vertical direction. The curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided at a position above the upper edge of the exposure opening 32b that exposes the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 in the center frame 32. As shown in FIG. The vertical dimension of the curtain plate rails 54 a and 54 b is set larger than the vertical dimension of the movable curtain plate 52 , and the entirety of the rails 54 a and 54 b exists on the back surface of the center frame 32 . That is, the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided so as not to protrude toward the exposure opening 32b.

Slide members 55a and 55b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. Each slide member 55a, 55b is slidable in the vertical direction along the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a, 54b. Each of the slide members 55a and 55b is integrated with the movable panel 52 via a connecting portion (not shown). In this case, the left slide member 55a is integrated with the area closer to the left end than the longitudinal central position of the movable panel 52, and the right slide member 55b is integrated with the movable panel 52. are integrated with respect to a region closer to the right end than the central position in the longitudinal direction. Each slide member 55a, 55b is fixed so as to protrude upward from the upper end portion of the movable panel 52. As shown in FIG. As the slide members 55a and 55b slide on the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a and 54b, the movable curtain plate 52 integrated with the slide members 55a and 55b is vertically displaced.

There is a predetermined amount of play in the connection between the movable panel 52 and the slide members 55a and 55b, and the movable panel 52 rotates clockwise and counterclockwise with the front-rear direction as the rotation axis. Displacement is allowed. As a result, the height position of one of the slide members 55a and 55b can be made different from the other within the range until the tilt angle of the movable panel 52 reaches a predetermined angle.

A pinion gear (not shown) is provided on each of the slide members 55a and 55b, and a rack (not shown) is provided on each of the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. In addition, each of the slide members 55a and 55b is provided with a curtain plate driving portion 56a and 56b for rotationally driving the pinion gear. When the left panel drive unit 56a is driven, the left slide member 55a is displaced in the vertical direction, and the left region of the panel movable member 52 becomes vertically displaceable with respect to the right region. The right slide member 55b is displaced in the vertical direction by the drive unit 56b for the curtain plate being in the driving state, and the right side region of the movable plate member 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the left side region. In addition, both the left and right side panel drive portions 56a and 56b are driven, so that the left and right slide members 55a and 55b are both displaced in the vertical direction, and the entire panel movable object 52 is moved. is vertically displaced.

When the slide members 55a and 55b are present on the side of the panel rails 54a and 54b farthest from the exposure opening 32b, that is, when they are present at the upper ends of the panel rails 54a and 54b , most of the curtain plate movable member 52 is hidden behind the center frame 32, and only a small area exists within the exposed opening 32b. This position is the initial position of the panel movable object 52, and the panel movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position in a situation where the production using the panel movable object 52 is not performed.

In a situation where the panel movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position, the panel drive units 56a and 56b are driven, so that the panel movable object 52 moves toward the center of the exposure opening 32b. . This displacement is performed with the limit position at which the slide members 55a and 55b reach the ends of the panel rails 54a and 54b near the exposure opening 32b, that is, the lower ends of the panel rails 54a and 54b. will be As the panel movable object 52 descends, the area of the panel movable object 52 exposed from the exposure opening 32b becomes wider.

In a configuration in which the panel movable object 52 can be displaced between the initial position and the limit position, panel initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided for detecting that the panel movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position. It is The curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. Optical sensors are used as the curtain board initial position sensors 57a and 57b, but the types of sensors such as switch-type sensors and electromagnetic sensors are arbitrary.

Adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided as sensors for detecting the position of the movable panel 52 in addition to the initial panel position sensors 57a and 57b. The adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. More specifically, these adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the existence of the slide members 55a and 55b at predetermined positions closer to the limit position than the initial position. It is provided so as to detect that the slide members 55a and 55b are present at the intermediate position of. Optical sensors are used as the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, but any type of sensor such as a switch-type sensor or an electromagnetic sensor may be used.

The operation pattern of the movable panel 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6(a) to 6(e). A portion of the movable panel board 52 exposed to the front side of the game board 26 through the exposure opening 32b is hatched.

First, the first stage operation will be described. In the first stage operation, in a situation where the movable body 52 of the curtain plate is arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. When the parts 56a and 56b are driven, the entire panel movable object 52 is displaced downward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 6(d)). This downward displacement is stopped when the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. In the case of the curtain plate presentation in which only the first stage motion is performed, the return motion is performed after the stopped state is maintained for a predetermined period.

In the return operation, the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are driven in opposite directions at the same time, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 rises while maintaining a horizontal state. This upward movement is stopped when both the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding panel initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and the return to the initial positions is completed.

Next, a second step operation that is performed continuously without returning to the initial position after the first step operation will be described. After the first step operation, the driving portions 56a and 56b for the curtain plates are driven so that the vertical positions of the slide members 55a and 55b are relatively changed, so that FIG. As shown in 6(c), most of the panel movable member 52 is exposed through the exposure opening 32b, and alternately slopes downward to the left and slopes downward to the right. The operation of repeating this alternately inclined state is the second stage operation. As a result, the movable member 52 can move not only downward but also tilt to the left and right, thereby diversifying the operation modes.

After that, a pair waiting operation is performed. In the pair waiting operation, as shown in FIG. 6(d), the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are moved until both the slide members 55a and 55b reach the positions detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. It becomes a driving state. As a result, the curtain board movable object 52 is in a horizontal state at a position slightly returned to the initial position side. When only the first stage operation and the second stage operation are performed, the return operation is performed after the pair waiting operation is performed, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 returns to the initial position. Become.

Next, a description will be given of the third stage operation which is performed continuously without returning to the initial position after the second stage operation and the pair waiting operation. In the third stage operation, after the pair waiting operation, the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together, as shown in FIG. 6(e). Second, the panel movable member 52 is displaced downward as a whole while maintaining a horizontal state. After that, the movable panel 52 returns to the initial position by performing the returning operation.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of curtain plate effects using the movable curtain plate 52. Specifically,
・The first stage effect that becomes the first stage action → return action,
・ A second stage production of first stage operation → second stage operation → pair waiting operation → return operation,
・ A third stage production of first stage operation → second stage operation → pair waiting operation → third stage operation → return operation,
exists.

These multiple types of effects occur as effects during a game cycle, and the degree of expectation for the result of the big win is different when each occurs. Specifically, the 3rd stage effect occurs in a game round where the expectation of the big win result is higher than the 1st stage effect and the 2nd stage effect, and the 2nd stage effect has a higher expectation of the big win result than the 1st stage effect. Occurs in high game times.

Next, referring to FIG. 5 again, the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described.

The disk movable units 61a and 61b are arranged in front of the display surface G of the pattern display device 31, cover a part of the display surface G from the front, and are a pair of disk movable units provided so that the covered area is variable. Animals 62a and 62b and a pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b for displacing the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are provided. Each disk movable object 62a, 62b has the same configuration, and has a circular shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the same decoration is applied to the front surfaces of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The decoration has an anisotropic shape that does not overlap when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a predetermined rotational position and when arranged at a specific rotational position different from that. there is More specifically, the decoration has an anisotropic shape that does not overlap between any rotational positions of the disk movables 62a and 62b.

The decorations of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b may have an anisotropic shape that does not overlap between some predetermined rotational positions. Further, the outer edge shape of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b may be an anisotropic shape that does not overlap between some predetermined rotational positions. It may be a shape having properties. In the case of such an anisotropic shape, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which decorations that do not have anisotropy, that is, decorations that overlap between any rotational positions, are attached. An anisotropic decoration that does not overlap may be added, or an anisotropic decoration that does not overlap between any rotational positions may be added.

Each disk movable object 62a, 62b is driven by the corresponding disk driving unit 63a, 63b to rotate and slide. The pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b have the same configuration. Specifically, each disc drive unit 63a, 63b has disc rails 64a, 64b extending obliquely from the outside of each corner under the exposure opening 32b toward the center of the exposure opening 32b. It has The disk rails 64a and 64b are provided so as to extend inside and outside the exposure opening 32b with reference to the periphery of the exposure opening 32b. The disc rails 64 a and 64 b have lengths larger than the diameters of the disc movable objects 62 a and 62 b , and part of them exist on the back surface of the center frame 32 .

Guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the disc rails 64a and 64b. Each shaft-equipped guide member 65a, 65b is obliquely slidable along the corresponding disk rails 64a, 64b. is rotatable as a rotation axis. The shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b are integrated with the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b by inserting the rotating shafts into the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b, respectively. The shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b are provided on the rear surfaces of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and are entirely covered from the front by the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. When the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts slide on the corresponding disc rails 64a and 64b, the movable discs 62a and 62b integrated with the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are obliquely displaced. When the rotation bases of the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts rotate, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b integrated with the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts rotate.

Drive rollers, driven rollers (not shown), and conveyor belts that are driven to rotate by these rollers are provided on the disk rails 64a and 64b, respectively. department is provided. Further, each of the disc rails 64a and 64b is provided with a disc slide driving portion 66a and 66b for rotationally driving the drive roller. When the disk slide drive portions 66a and 66b are driven, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are obliquely displaced. Further, each of the shafted guide members 65a and 65b is provided with a disk rotation driving portion 67a and 67b (not shown) for rotating the rotation base. When the disk rotation drive portions 67a and 67b are driven, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotated.

When the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are located near the center in the longitudinal direction on the disc rails 64a and 64b, the corresponding disc movable members 62a and 62b are partly hidden behind the center frame 32, Only the area of 1 is a position existing in the exposure opening 32b. This position is the initial position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b in the sliding direction. In addition, in a situation where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not used for performance, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged so that predetermined portions of the decorations attached to the surface of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are at predetermined rotational positions. , 62b are determined. This position is the initial position in the direction of rotation of the disk movable members 62a and 62b. The initial position in the sliding direction and the initial position in the rotating direction are the initial positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

In a situation where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the corresponding disk slide drive portions 66a and 66b are driven, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are directed toward the central side of the exposure opening 32b. to move. This displacement is limited to the positions where the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts reach the ends of the disc rails 64a and 64b near the center of the exposure opening 32b, that is, the upper ends of the disc rails 64a and 64b. done. In the state of being arranged at this limit position, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are entirely exposed through the exposure opening 32b. Further, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotated by driving the disk rotation drive portions 67a and 67b at any position in the sliding direction. The rotation operation is possible even while the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are sliding.

A slide for detecting that the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial position in the sliding direction in a configuration in which the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are slidable between the initial position and the limit position in the sliding direction. Initial position sensors 68a and 68b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The slide initial position sensors 68 a and 68 b are provided on the rear surface of the center frame 32 . Optical sensors are used as the slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b, but any type of sensor such as a switch-type sensor or an electromagnetic sensor may be used.

In a configuration in which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotatable and an initial position in the rotational direction exists as the rotational position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial position in the rotational direction. Rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b for detecting that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are provided on the corresponding guide members 65a and 65b with shafts, and are provided so as not to follow the rotation of the rotation base and disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Optical sensors are used as the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, but any sensor type such as a switch sensor or an electromagnetic sensor may be used.

The operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b will be described with reference to FIGS. 7(a) to 7(e).

As shown in FIG. 7(a), when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the disk slide driving parts 66a and 66b are driven to move the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. When the disk movable objects 62a and 62b slide in an oblique direction and reach the limit position as shown in FIG. In this case, the driving portions 66a and 66b for driving the disk slides are driven so that the sliding movements of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized. In addition, while the slide movement is being performed, the disk rotation drive portions 67a and 67b are kept in a non-driving state, so the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not rotated.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the limit position has been reached is made in a configuration in which the disk slide drive portions 66a and 66b are driven so as to achieve a predetermined slide speed. is driven by the measurement result of the duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a sensor for detecting that the disk rails 64a and 64b have reached the limit position at a position corresponding to the limit position is provided, and the detection result of the sensor is provided. may be configured to determine whether or not the limit position has been reached.

After that, the disk rotation drive portions 67a and 67b are driven, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start rotating in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. 7(c). In this case, the initial positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b in the rotation direction are set so that the decorations attached to the front surfaces of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are the same. The decoration modes of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are the same. Further, each disk movable object 62a, 62b starts rotating at the same start timing and rotates in the same direction at the same rotational speed. Therefore, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate in synchronization with each other.

However, it is not limited to this, and each disk movable object 62a, 62b may be configured to rotate in the opposite direction to each other. In order to inform during the game that the degree of expectation is high or that the result of a big win will be achieved, it may exceptionally be configured to rotate in mutually opposite directions.

After that, the disk slide driving parts 66a and 66b are driven in the opposite direction, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start to slide toward the initial position in the sliding direction, as shown in FIG. 7(d). As shown in , it will eventually return to the initial position in the sliding direction. In this case, since the disk rotation driving parts 67a and 67b are kept in a driven state even while the sliding movement toward the initial position is being performed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b slide while rotating. It will happen. Moreover, these sliding movements and rotations are also performed in a mutually synchronized state between the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7(e), the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are set to the initial positions in the rotational direction, and the rotational movements of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are also stopped.

Note that the effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is used as a effect indicating that the degree of expectation for the result of the big win is medium or higher. For example, when the degree of expectation is medium, only one of the pair of disk movable objects 62a and 62b performs the sliding and rotating operations as shown in FIGS. When the degree is high, both the pair of disk movable members 62a and 62b are synchronously slid and rotated as shown in FIGS. 7(a) to 7(e). In addition, when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b return to the initial positions, a situation may occur in which the rotating motion is stopped before the sliding motion, and the sliding motion and the rotating motion are stopped at the same time or substantially at the same time. Situations can arise.

Next, the first light-emitting portion group 71, the second light-emitting portion group 72, and the third light-emitting portion group 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

All of the first light emitting portion group 71 , the second light emitting portion group 72 and the third light emitting portion group 73 are provided on the center frame 32 . Each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 includes a plurality of LEDs 71a, 72a, 73a as a plurality of light emitters. These LEDs 71a to 73a are of a multicolor light emission type, and can emit at least white, blue, red, green, and yellow lights. Each light emitting unit group 71-73 has a plurality of LEDs 71a-73a arranged in a plurality of columns and a plurality of rows. In this case, when light of different colors is emitted between different columns or between different rows in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the LEDs 71a to 73a are adjusted so that the player can recognize the difference in color. Position and light intensity are set. Although the number of LEDs differs between the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, and the arrangement of the LEDs also differs, some of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 have the same number of LEDs or the arrangement of the LEDs. , or the number of LEDs or the arrangement of the LEDs may be the same among all the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 .

Each of the LEDs 71a to 73a of each of the light emitting portion groups 71 to 73 is provided in the center frame 32 so as to be covered from the front by light transmitting portions 74, 75, and 76 which are formed in a semi-transparent white color. Among the light emitting portion groups 71 to 73, the first light emitting portion group 71 is provided above and to the left of the exposure opening 32b, and the second light emitting portion group 72 is provided above the exposure opening 32b. It is provided at a position closer to the center, and the third light emitting section group 73 is provided at a position on the right side of the exposure opening 32b.

The lighting of the light in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is used as an effect, and is also used as a status notification of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加These contents will be explained later in detail.

Returning to the description of the game board 20, a rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20. The rail portion 37 constitutes a guide rail. A game ball shot from a mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the game ball shooting mechanism, a game ball shooting operation is performed by operating a shooting handle 41 provided on the front part of the game machine main body 12 .

As shown in FIG. 1, a window portion 42 is formed in the front portion of the game machine main body 12 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 43 (not shown). The window panel 43 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42 . A display light emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 as part of the light emitting means. Speaker units 45 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44 to output sound effects and the like according to the game state.

An upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 which bulge forward are provided vertically in parallel below the window portion 42 in the front portion of the game machine main body 12 . An upper plate 46a which opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a which likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a. Game balls paid out from a payout device mounted on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 are discharged to the upper tray 46a and the lower tray 47a.

In the area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 46, an effect operation device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operating section of the effect operating device 48 is manually operated by the player to set the effect content on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 or the like to predetermined effect content.

On the back side of the game machine main body 12, a main control device, a sound emission control device, a display control device, a payout mechanism section including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power/fire control device are mounted. there is The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 90 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 90, the board box housing the main control board 91 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the circuit board box are combined inseparably, and the structure of the joint part that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 90 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 92 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 95 provided in the main control device 90 and a payout control device 101 . A power supply/emission control device 102 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95 , and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU92. The various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e are provided with one-to-one detection for the prize-corresponding ball entry parts such as the general prize opening 21, the special electric prize winning device 22, the upper operation opening 23, the lower operation opening 24, and the through gate 25. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a prize winning determination for each ball entry section. Further, in the MPU 92, various lotteries are executed based on winnings to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24. FIG.

The output side of the MPU 92 is connected with a power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 101 and a sound emission control device 103. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 101 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 103 . Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, there are a special electric drive unit 22b that opens and closes the open/close door 22a of the special electric prize winning device 22, a general electric drive unit 24b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operation opening 24, A special figure display unit 33 and a normal figure display unit 34 are connected. In addition, although illustration is omitted in FIG. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the driving section 22b for the special electric so that the special electric prize winning device 22 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric accessory 24a is won in the open state, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 24b so that the general electric accessory 24a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 33 is performed in MPU92 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 24a is to be specified, the MPU 92 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 34. FIG. Further, when the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 33, the display control of the special figure reservation light emitting unit 35 is executed in the MPU 92, When the winning to the through gate 25 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 34, the display control of the normal pattern holding light emitting unit 36 is executed in the MPU92.

The blackout monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply/launch control device 102, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 102, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 101 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 104 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 90 .

The power supply/launch control device 102 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a game hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 91, the payout control device 101, and the like are generated with operating power required for each, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 102 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 90 . The power/shooting control device 102 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 105, and the game ball shooting mechanism 105 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio emission control device 103 includes an audio emission control board 111 on which an MPU 112 is mounted. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

Based on the command received from the main controller 90, the MPU 112 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game round, the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. Then, light emission control of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 provided on the game board 20 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 provided on the front surface of the game machine body 12 is performed. Further, the MPU 112 is electrically connected to the panel drive units 53a and 53b of the panel movable unit 51, and is also electrically connected to the disk drive units 63a and 63b of the disk panel movable units 61a and 61b. The drive units 53a and 53b for the curtain plates and the drive units 63a and 63b for the discs are driven and controlled so that the operations corresponding to the contents determined above are performed. Further, the MPU 112 controls light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine body 12 . In addition, the effect operation device 48 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 monitors whether the effect operation device 48 is operated or not, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, the effect operation device 48 is operated. A process for reflecting the operation on the progress of the production is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 112 determines whether or not it is necessary to make a notification based on the command received from the main control device 90, and performs light emission control of various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45. We will notify you by

The MPU 112 is electrically connected to the display control device 120 . The MPU 112 transmits to the display control device 120 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 90 and a command including the content of notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 90. Note that the display control device 120 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 90 without going through the sound emission control device 103 , and in relation to the main control device 90 , communication is performed rather than the sound emission control device 103 . It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 120 includes a display control board 121 on which an MPU 122, which is an element in which a program ROM 123 and a work RAM 124 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 125, a character ROM 126, and a video RAM 127 are mounted. It has

The MPU 122 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 103 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 125 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 125).

The program ROM 123 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 122 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. The work RAM 124 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by the MPU 122, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold stored information. is.

The VDP 125 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 31 . Since the VDP 125 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 125 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 122, the video RAM 127, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 126 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 31 . The character ROM 126 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 127 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 31 , and the display content of the pattern display device 31 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 127 .

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 112, the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 of the sound emission control device 103 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 112, the sound and light side ROM 113 and the sound and light side RAM 114 respectively, and the MPU 122, the program ROM 123 and the The work RAM 124 is called a display-side MPU 122, a display-side ROM 123, and a display-side RAM 124, respectively.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by two-way communication.

That is, the audio emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 131, and the sound and light side MPU 112 uses the first signal line group 131 to display the image. A command is transmitted toward the side MPU 122 . Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 131 includes a signal line 132 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. and a signal line 134 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. It should be noted that a configuration in which a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission is separately provided may be employed.

Further, the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using a second signal line group 141, and sound and light signals are transmitted from the display side MPU 122 using the second signal line group 141. A command is transmitted toward the side MPU 112 . Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 141 includes a signal line 142 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. and a signal line 144 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. It should be noted that a configuration in which a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission is separately provided may be employed.

The first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector to which one ends of the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are aggregated, and a connector to which the other ends are aggregated. It is detachably attached to the connector of the control device 103 , and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 120 .

Note that the communication method between the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 92 of Main Control Unit 90>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 92 of the main controller 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display unit 33, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 31, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 34, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 31 come off and fluctuate The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variation type that determines the display duration in the special figure display unit 33 and the pattern display device 31 A counter CS is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is in the general electrical open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is retained and stored in the RAM 94 provided as acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. Stored in area 94a.

The pending storage area 94a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. , a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 are reserved and stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 33, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the common electronic role 24a are mutually different. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area, the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operation opening 24 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric role open lottery using the general electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 24a is in the open state when winning the general electric open state is set more than in the low-frequent support mode, and one open time is set. set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 24a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time ( That is, the duration of one display on the normal map display unit 34) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower opening 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working port 23 is higher than the lower working port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 24 is more likely to be won than the upper working port 23. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the general electricity open state per unit time is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of being elected in the electric power open state in the lottery is increased. In addition, after one general electric role open lottery is performed, the time secured when the next general electric role open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 25 In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time are prepared, high-frequency support mode is more likely to select a shorter reserved time than low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be set. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next general electric role opening lottery is performed after one general electric role opening lottery is performed is shortened. , By applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased. good too.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24.例文帳に追加

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the ROM 93 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the winning probability of the high-probability mode is higher than that of the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24.例文帳に追加

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 93 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 29" correspond to the high probability jackpot result. ing.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The open/close execution mode is a mode in which a round game is performed 15 times. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 22. That is. The upper limit duration is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number is set to nine. In addition, in each round game, the opening of the special electric prize winning device 22 is performed only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 105 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. . Then, in each round game, the upper limit continuous time is set to be longer than the product of the shooting cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special electric prize winning device 22 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 31. - 特許庁The expected effect is a game machine equipped with a pattern display device 31 capable of performing variable display of patterns, and in a game cycle in which a predetermined jackpot result is achieved, the final stop result is the award corresponding result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the rest of the symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , a combination of ready-to-win patterns is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G to perform a ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. is executed.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 90 but by the sound emission control device 103 . In this case, in the sound emission control device 103, the game rounds corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate the notice display than the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the notice display with a low appearance rate is. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 31 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used to determine the display duration in the special figure display unit 33 and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 31 in the MPU 92 . The value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 33 and the start of the variation in the design by the design display device 31.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by MPU 92 of Main Control Unit 90>
Next, each process executed by the MPU 92 of the main controller 90 to progress the game will be described. The processing of the MPU 92 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 second elapses after the main process is activated without proceeding to the next process. In step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 102 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to "1". determine whether In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 in order to recognize the current game state. do. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 101 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 101 .

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 94, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. The main control board 91 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 92 . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and starts and executes timer interrupt processing under at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer Interrupt processing is activated. That is, depending on the execution status of processing in the MPU 92, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has passed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing is started after 3.9 msec has passed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific period such as 4 msec regardless of the contents of the processing in the MPU 92, basically the timer interrupt process is started at a specific period. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the next timing of the predetermined timing In the timer interrupt processing in , the amount exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing at the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

Now, in the timer interrupt process, a power failure information storage process is first executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information was executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In the subsequent step S205, game stop determination processing is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

Specifically, a radio wave detection sensor, a magnet detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine body 12 . The MPU 92 determines whether or not illegal radio waves are being output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor, and attaches a magnet to the game board 20 based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor. It is determined whether or not an act of approaching is performed, and based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor, it is determined whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加If an affirmative determination is made in any of these determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to fraudulent action on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of processing for progressing the game is stopped.

After that, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If the progress of the game is stopped, the process for outputting the notification command is executed in step S207, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the processing for outputting the notification command, when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output for the occurrence of the specific event, the notification command is sent to the sound emission control device 103. Output. Since the notification command includes the details of the specific event that triggered the output, the sound emission control device 103 sets the execution of the notification corresponding to the details of the specific event.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S206 that the progress of the game is not stopped, the process from step S208 onwards is executed. In step S208, processing for outputting a release command is executed. In the processing for outputting the release command, when the state in which the specific event that triggered the output of the notification command has already been released and the release command has not yet been output in response to the release, the release A command is output to the sound emission control device 103 . Since the cancellation command includes the content of the specific event to be canceled that triggered the output, the sound emission control device 103 performs notification cancellation setting corresponding to the specific event.

In subsequent step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 22b and 24b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 22 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 22b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 24b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S210, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S211, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from each of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read, and a ball enters the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, and the through gate 25. Execute processing to identify the presence or absence of

In subsequent step S212, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 94. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S213, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting handle 41, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the subsequent step S214, as input state monitoring processing, it is confirmed that the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are disconnected and that the gaming machine body 12 is open based on the information read in the read processing of step S210. In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine main body 12 is open, the notification command output process is executed in the same manner as in step S207. In the process for outputting the notification command, a notification command indicating that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state and a notification command indicating that the prize detection sensors 96a to 96e are disconnected are transmitted. In addition, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the dispensing control device 101, it is determined whether or not the lower tray 47a is full, and whether or not the dispensing device 104 has an abnormality. If affirmative determination is made in these determinations, the notification command corresponding to it is transmitted.

In the subsequent step S215, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed. The processing contents of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later in detail.

In continuing step S216, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed. In the general/universal electric control process, when a prize to the through gate 25 is generated, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general/universal electric role item opening counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. In the case, open determination is performed for the numerical information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 24a of the lower operation opening 24 is performed.

In the subsequent step S217, based on the processing results of the previous step S215 and step S216, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 33, update the display content of the normal figure display unit 34 Set the output information for

In the following step S218, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 101 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S219, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S220, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process (step S215).

In the special figure special electric control process, first, the acquisition process of the pending information is executed in step S301. In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 has occurred, and if the winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 94a is the upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 is used for holding. Store in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

It should be noted that, if the winning to the upper operation opening 23 and the lower operation opening 24 occurs at the same time, the process for acquiring the above-mentioned pending information is repeated multiple times within the range where the process for acquiring the pending information is executed once. Run.

After executing the pending information acquisition process in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, the process of reading the information of the special special electric counter provided in RAM94 is performed, and the process of reading out the special special electric address table from ROM93 is performed in step S303. Then, in step S304, a process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

Here, the processing contents of steps S302 to S304 will be described.

As already explained, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game cycle and the process related to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the processing related to the effect for the game cycle includes a special figure variation start process (step S306) which is a process for starting the effect for the game cycle, and a process for advancing the effect for the game cycle. A special figure changing process (step S307) and a special figure fixing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game cycle, are set.

In addition, as processing related to the opening/closing execution mode, special electric start processing (step S309), which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and special electric opening processing (step S309), which is processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 22 Intermediate processing (step 310), special electric closing processing (step S311) which is processing for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 22, ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and game state at the end of the opening and closing execution mode A special electric end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above multiple types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program for executing the special figure fluctuation process (step S307). It is a start address, the start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during special figure determination (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing (step S309) The start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is the program start address for executing the special electric closed process (step S311). The start address, the start address SA6, is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing (step S312).

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the special special electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the special special electric control in the next processing time It is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared (initialized) to "0" corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter should be executed.

After executing the process of step S304, in step S305, the process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Concretely, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to special figure fluctuation start processing of step S306. In the special figure fluctuation start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the reservation information is held and stored, and the game round in which the fluctuation display is performed in the symbol display device 31 and the special figure display unit 33 is started. Execute the process. The details will be explained later.

When the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to processing during special figure fluctuation of step S307. In the special figure fluctuation process, it is during the display duration of the game round, and the process of determining whether it is the timing before the final stop display is executed, and if it is before the final stop display, A process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern is executed.

By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure fluctuation process until it is time to display the final stop, if it is not the timing to display the final stop, after executing the process for changing the above regularly, this special figure Terminate the process during fluctuation. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure fluctuation process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the timing of the final stop display. Also, when it comes to the timing to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing to the special figure fixed processing Update accordingly.

When the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to processing during special figure determination of step S308. In the special figure determination process, in order to display the final stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 31, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103, and the design of the special figure display unit 33 is displayed. The display mode is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the period during the final stop display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs. If a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition processing is executed.

By the way, instead of waiting in the processing during special figure determination until the period during the final stop display passes, when the period has not passed, the processing during this special figure determination is terminated. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, until the period during the final stop display elapses, the special figure fixing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started. In addition, when the period during the final stop display has passed, in the situation where the transition to the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special special electric counter is initialized (that is, "0" cleared), and the opening and closing execution mode By adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter in the situation where the transition occurs, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure confirmation in-process to the one corresponding to the special electric start processing.

If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to special electric start processing in step S309. In the special electric start processing, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 . Further, in the special electric start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has passed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the special electric start processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric start processing. Therefore, after the opening effect of the opening and closing execution mode is started, the special electric start processing is started every time the special figure special electric control processing is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has passed, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing. .

If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to step S310 during special electric open processing. In the special electric open process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. It should be noted that, at the start of the first round game, the special electric prize winning device 22 is brought into the open state, and an open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 . When the termination condition of the round game is not satisfied, the special electric open processing is terminated after the processing for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is executed instead of waiting in the special electric open processing. If the above termination conditions are met, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing. Update.

If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to step S311 during special electric closing processing. In the special electric closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 22 is closed and a closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 . Also, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not elapsed, the processing during special electric closing is terminated instead of waiting in the processing during special electric closing. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special electric closing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period has elapsed. Also, when the interval period has passed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing. do.

On the other hand, in the special electric closing process for the last round game, after executing the process to end the round game, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special electric closing process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to special electric end processing in step S312. In the special call termination process, an ending command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is to be terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 . Further, in the special electric end processing, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode has passed. If the ending period has not passed, this special electric end processing is ended instead of waiting in the special electric end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect of the opening and closing execution mode is started, the special electric end processing is started every time the special figure special electric control processing is started until the ending period elapses. Also, when the ending period has passed, after executing the processing for setting the game state (win or fail lottery mode and support mode) after the opening and closing execution mode, By initializing the numerical information of the special special electric counter , The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process (step S306).

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first in step S401, it is determined whether or not the number N of reservations is 1 or more. When the number N of reservations is "0", this special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. If the pending number N is 1 or more, data setting processing is executed in step S402.

In the data setting process, first, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations N, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved area RE2→first reserved area RE1, third reserved area RE3→second reserved area RE2, fourth reserved area RE4→third reserved area RE3. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a shift-time command for making the sound emission control device 103 recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set as an output target and transmitted.

In the subsequent step S403, the success/failure determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the high-probability mode, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode provided in the ROM 93 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for success/failure determination, that is, the numerical value obtained from the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. In addition, in the case of the low-probability mode, the low-probability mode success/failure table provided in the ROM 93 is referred to, and numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is used as the low-probability jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information.

In the following step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S403 is a jackpot winning result. In the case of a jackpot winning result, distribution determination processing is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, referring to the distribution table provided in the ROM 93, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which of the low-probability jackpot results and the high-probability jackpot results corresponds to which jackpot result.

In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 93. , the specified information is stored in the RAM 94 . In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 33 is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the RAM 94 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result. Set "1" to the flag.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the winning result is not a jackpot winning result, then in step S408 a stop result setting process for an out result is executed. Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game round corresponding to the start of this fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 93. and stores the specified information in the RAM 94 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the processing in either step S407 or step S408, in step S409, processing for grasping the display duration time is executed. In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round corresponding to the start of this fluctuation is a high-probability jackpot result or a low-probability jackpot result, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. Further, when the numerical information acquired from the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 93 is referred to, and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 93 is referred to, and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is displayed. get. Incidentally, the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach display duration table is different from the display duration that can be obtained by referring to the reach generation display duration table.

In addition, the display continuation time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the holding number N increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected. A display duration table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation time may be configured such that it does not change according to the number of reservations N and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration time when reach occurs. In addition, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the losing reach, and the case of the losing result of no reach. In this case, the display continuation time is distributed according to each game result.

In the following step S410, the information of the display duration acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 33 and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 31 are performed. is displayed (in the symbol display device 31, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the activated line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this regard, the display continuation time can also be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

In the subsequent step S411, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets. The variation command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for reach generation. Even if the information about the presence or absence of reach occurrence is not included in the command for display, it is possible for the audio light emission control device 103, which is a sub-side control device, to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the display duration information. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Also, the type command includes information on the game result. The variation command and type command set as output targets in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 103, which is a sub-side control device.

After performing the process of step S411, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display part 33 is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1 ”. After that, this special figure fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Execution control of effects and notifications>
Next, execution control of effects and notifications using various output devices executed by the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 will be described.

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound/light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by two-way communication. By exchanging commands through two-way communication, the sound and light side MPU 112 controls light emission of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and drive control of various movable objects including the panel movable unit 51 and the disc movable units 61a and 61b are executed, and display control of the pattern display device 31 is executed in the display side MPU 122. . Specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described below.

<Timer interrupt processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 112 at relatively short intervals (for example, 4 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S501, master side command storage process is executed. The master side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound and light side RAM 114 when a command is received from the MPU 92 of the main controller 90 (hereinafter referred to as the master side MPU 92). The sound and light side RAM 114 is provided with a main side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 92, and the commands received from the main side MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the main side ring buffer. As they are stored, they are read out sequentially according to the order in which they were stored.

In the following step S502, display-side command storage processing is executed. The display-side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound and light RAM 114 when a command is received from the display-side MPU 122 . The sound and light RAM 114 is provided with a display-side ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the display-side MPU 122. Commands received from the display-side MPU 122 are sequentially stored in the display-side ring buffer. As they are stored, they are read out sequentially according to the order in which they were stored.

After that, in step S503, master-side command processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the master-side MPU 92 is executed, and in step S504, processing corresponding to the command received from the display-side MPU 122 is performed. , and in step S505, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. , and in step S506, sound output control processing for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. A movable object control process for controlling the drive of the is executed. Details of the processing in steps S503 to S507 will be described later.

After that, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is valid. In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where one unit of performance such as a game round performance is executed by a predetermined start trigger, when the performance operation device 48 is operated, the progress of the performance is changed to the content corresponding to it. can occur. On the other hand, even if the effect operation device 48 is operated outside the effective period, the operation itself does not affect the progress of the effect, and the operation itself is invalidated. In step S508, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid period.

If a negative determination is made in step S508, the timer interrupt processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S508, it is determined whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated in step S509.

Here, the effect operation device 48 outputs a LOW level operation signal when the operation section is not operated, and outputs a HI level operation signal when the operation section is operated. In the sound and light side MPU 112, when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period, the port section to which data corresponding to the level of the signal received from the effect operation device 48 is written is periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle). When monitoring is started and the number of times of monitoring processing in which the state of receiving a LOW level signal is confirmed, followed by the number of times of monitoring processing in which the state of receiving a HI level signal is confirmed consecutively (for example, two times) , in step S509, it is determined that the effect operating device 48 has been operated.

It should be noted that the relationship between HI and LOW of the operation signal may be reversed, and the presence or absence of operation is not determined on the side where the operation of the effect operation device 48 is started, but the operation of the effect operation device 48 is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the presence or absence of an operation is determined on the side.

If a negative determination is made in step S509, this timer interrupt processing is terminated as it is, and if the effect operation device 48 is operated, in step S510, after transmitting an operation generation command to the display side MPU 122, End this timer interrupt processing. The operation generation command is a command for making the display side MPU 122 recognize that the effect operating device 48 has been operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operating device 48 . The effect of transmitting the command will be described later.

<Main side command correspondence processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the master-side command handling process executed in step S503 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a command for variation and a type command have been received from the main MPU 92 . If these commands have been received, a game result storage process is executed in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information about the result of the winner lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 92 at the start of the current game round, that is, the information of the current game Information indicating whether the game result of the round is a high-probability jackpot result, a low-probability jackpot result, or a loss result is specified, and processing of writing the specified information in the holding data area 161 provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is executed. do. The retained data area 161 is data that is temporarily used to execute effects and notifications during game turns and opening/closing execution modes. This is an area for storing and holding data to make it available independently in the .

In the subsequent step S603, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 31 is to perform the advance notice display in the current game round. As already explained, such an advance notice display may be performed in a situation where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have been variably displayed after the symbol display device 31 has started to variably display the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous aspect. , and those in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the previous patterns are also included. The notice display can occur in any game round when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but the rate when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the advance notice display with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A preliminary lottery will be held.

In the following step S604, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a high-probability jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is displayed as the current stop result. information. In this case, the types of the same symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd-numbered symbols are likely to be selected as symbols forming a combination of the same symbols. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low-probability jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is Determined as information on the results of this stoppage. In this case, the types of the same symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a result of losing, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display is specified from the content of the variation command. Then, when the ready-to-win display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the result of the stoppage to be carried out is determined as the information of the result of the stoppage of this time. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win display does not occur, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the stop does not establish the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result.

In the subsequent step S605, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the display duration of the game round is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, and information on the display duration, information on the game result specified in step S602 above, And an effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step S603 is selected.

In the subsequent step S606, a process of writing each information of the type of effect pattern selected in step S605 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S604 in the holding data area 161 of the sound/light side RAM 114 is executed. Since the effect pattern includes information about the display duration of the current game round, by writing the effect pattern information in the holding data area 161, not only the effect pattern information but also the display duration information can be displayed. Also, the sound and light side MPU 112 can read again. However, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not measure the display duration time.

In subsequent step S607, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S604 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S605 are transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of these commands will be described later.

In subsequent step S608, update processing of the number of games is executed. In the updating process, a process for updating the game number counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM 114 is executed so that the number of games counted in the game number counter is incremented by one. The number of games played is the number of games played without switching to the opening/closing execution mode again after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the sound and light side MPU 112, it is possible to use the information of the number of games played when determining the contents of the effect. Take action to make it easier.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the process of step S608 is executed, it is determined in step S609 whether or not a final stop command has been received. When the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S610. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 122 to wait the stop symbols corresponding to the current game round on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain that state over the final stop time.

If a negative determination is made in step S609, or after the process of step S610 is executed, it is determined in step S611 whether or not an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, in step S612, update processing of the opening/closing execution mode count is executed. In the updating process, the opening/closing execution mode number counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound/light RAM 114 is updated so that the opening/closing execution mode number counted in the opening/closing execution mode number counter is incremented by one. Execute the process. The opening/closing execution mode count is the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode is not switched to the low-frequency support mode. In the sound and light side MPU 112, it is possible to use the information of the opening/closing execution mode number of times when determining the contents of the effect. A performance corresponding to it is executed.

In subsequent step S613, an opening handling process is executed. In the opening corresponding processing, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the content of the performance in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is determined. process for In this case, the result of the jackpot that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the result of the high-accuracy jackpot. When the final stop display is displayed for the combination of Determined as

As described above, in the holding data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM 114, information on the game result and information on the type of symbols to be stopped in the game round on the symbol display device 31 are stored with respect to the effect for the game round. When the opening/closing execution mode is entered following the execution of the game cycle, the game result information and the stop pattern type information stored in the holding data area 161 are cleared when the opening/closing execution mode ends. be. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display contents of the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute an effect including promotion contents in the opening/closing execution mode as described above. .

In addition, in the opening corresponding processing of step S613, the opening/closing execution mode number of times after updating in step S612 is specified, and an effect corresponding to the specified opening/closing execution mode number of times is set as an effect during the current opening/closing execution mode.

In subsequent step S614, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step S613 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S611, or after the processing of step S614 is executed, it is determined in step S615 whether or not an open command has been received. If the opening command has been received, in step S616, to make the display side MPU 122 recognize that the opening of the special electric prize winning device 22 has been newly started, that is, that the first round game has been newly started. , a release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 . Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S615, or after the process of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether or not a closing command has been received. If the closing command has been received, in step S618, the display side MPU 122 is instructed to recognize that the special electric prize winning device 22 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. Send a close command. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S617, or after the process of step S618 is executed, it is determined in step S619 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, then in step S620 the ending handling process is executed. In the ending handling process, the content of the success/failure lottery mode after the open/close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the contents of the ending effect corresponding to the type of success/failure lottery mode is executed. do. In this case, when the high-probability mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode, an effect including the contents for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is entered is determined as the current ending effect, and after the opening/closing execution mode. When the low-probability mode is set, an effect including contents for making the player recognize that the low-probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

In subsequent step S621, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step S620 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S619, or after the process of step S621 is executed, it is determined in step S622 whether or not a notification command has been received. If the notification command is received, it means that an event that should be notified, such as some kind of abnormality or a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10, has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in order to perform the notification, step In S623, light emission data reading processing is executed, and in step S624, sound output data reading processing is executed. The contents of each of these readout processes will be described later. After that, in step S625, a notification command corresponding to the contents of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S622, or after the process of step S625 is executed, it is determined in step S626 whether or not a release command has been received. If the cancellation command has been received, it means that the notification target event such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been cancelled. to execute the release setting process. Specific contents of the cancellation setting process will be described later. After that, in step S628, a release command corresponding to the contents of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 122 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S626 or after the processing of step S628 is executed, other processing is executed in step S629, and then this processing ends. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demonstration start command has been received, and if a demonstration start command has been received, the demonstration start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 .

Demonstration display means that a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open/close execution mode is not in progress. , or after the power supply to the main MPU 92 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demonstration without starting a new game round (for example, 3 sec ) has elapsed, the pattern display device 31 is started. In the demo display, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined action, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the display of the displayed image, or in place of it, a moving image of the manufacturer name, the model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols that were finally stopped and displayed in the previous game round may be used as the symbols. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of display side MPU 122>
Next, V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU 122 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 125 outputs an image signal for one frame to the pattern display device 31, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface G, and extends the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged side by side, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface G. FIG. In this case, the VDP 125 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 122 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display-side MPU 122 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed in step S701. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the display-side RAM 124 is analyzed. In subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result of step S701. If a new command has been received, command handling processing is executed in step S703.

In the command handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and a pattern command have been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, in step S802 the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display side ROM 123 and written in the display side RAM 124. End the process.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game round on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame (the frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing of the presentation for the current game cycle is defined.

The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when a high-probability jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration of the target game round is set. information, information on presence/absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

The information on the content of the task is information set to display the video corresponding to the game round this time, and unless information that does not reflect the information on the content of the task is set as additional data An image corresponding to the information of the content of the task is displayed in the frame. The information about the content of the task includes information about parameters necessary for instructing the drawing to the VDP 125 in order to display an image of one frame at the corresponding update timing.

Specifically, in the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information "0", and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information "200". , data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", data at the start of the normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and data at the start of the super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". data at the start of the fixed effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pieces of pointer information corresponds to delimitation timing such as the start of an effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling moving image display between break timings is set in pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence/absence of command output is information indicating whether or not a command is output from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound/light-side MPU 112 and the type of the command. The display-side MPU 122 outputs a command to the sound and light-side MPU 112 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, thereby causing the first light-emitting unit group 71, the second light-emitting unit group 72, the third light-emitting unit group 73, and the like to emit light. A light effect corresponding to the content of the image can be executed in the part, a sound output effect corresponding to the content of the image can be executed in the speaker part 45, and a curtain plate movable unit 51 and a disc movable unit 61a are enabled. , 61b and the like can execute an effect according to the content of the image.

Specifically, in the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, at the start of game round variation, based on command transmission from the display side MPU 122 to the sound and light side MPU 112, light emission control, sound output control, and the like are started in the sound and light side MPU 112. FIG. Also, in the contents of the task, data at the start of the notice effect, data at the start of normal reach, data at the start of super reach, data at the start of fixed effect, and data at the end of fluctuation are set from each pointer information For the pointer information of the timing before the number of frames (the number of pointers) for advance transmission, specifically, each pointer information of "198", "398", "698", "998", and "1398" , the command data is set. Therefore, the display-side MPU 122 sends a command to the sound and light-side MPU 112 in advance at break timings other than the start of the variation of the game cycle. , the content of the sound output control and the drive control of the movable object can be completely synchronized.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an instruction to execute notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the contents of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image as notification is set, the image display is such that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. done.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S803 whether or not a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, in step S804, after executing the setting process for the final stop, this command handling process ends. In the final stop setting process, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbols corresponding to the current game round until the period during the final stop display has passed is read out from the display side ROM 123 and written in the display side RAM 124. Run.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S805 whether or not an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, the data table for opening corresponding to the opening command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written to the display-side RAM 124 in step S806, after which this command handling process ends.

The data table for the opening is used to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening/closing execution mode on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31. It is a group of information that defines the processing necessary for The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, the opening data table contains not only a group of information defining the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image, but also a sound Data for command transmission to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

However, in the data table for the opening, the contents of the performance during each round game and the interval period between the round games are defined from the start of the opening performance. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the final update timing is held until the corresponding round game ends, and similarly, the data during the interval is set so that the corresponding interval ends. It is set so that the image of the loop or the final update timing is held until. The range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table for opening is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether either an open command or a close command has been received. If any command has been received, in step S808, after executing the opening/closing setting process, the command handling process ends. In the opening/closing setting process, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

If a negative determination is made in step S807, it is determined in step S809 whether or not an ending command has been received. If an ending command has been received, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written to the display-side RAM 124 in step S810, after which this command handling process ends.

The data table for the ending is necessary for displaying an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the current ending on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, the data table for the ending contains not only a group of information defining the processing necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image, but also a sound Data for command transmission to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S809, this command handling process is terminated after another handling process is executed in step S811.

In the different handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received. If the notification command has been received, in step S902, after executing the notification data setting process, the corresponding process for each book ends. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the content of notification included in the current notification command is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) in the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for the game cycle or the effect image for the opening/closing execution mode. .

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a release command has been received in step S903. If the release command has been received, in step S904, after executing the clearing process of the notification data, the corresponding process for each book ends. In the notification data clearing process, currently, among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification cancellation target in the cancellation command received this time is executed. Execute processing to clear data for As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type targeted for cancellation is cancelled.

If a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether or not an operation generation command has been received. As already described, the operation generation command is a command sent from the sound and light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period of operation of the effect operation device 48 . If the operation generation command has been received, the currently set data table is referred to in step S906 so that the timing at which the operation generation command is received corresponds to the effect operation set in the data table. It is determined whether the operation of the device 48 is valid for a period of time. If a negative determination is made in step S906, the book-specific correspondence processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S906, in step S907, the operation existence flag provided in the display side RAM 124 is set to " 1” is set, the process corresponding to each book is terminated. The presence of operation flag is a flag for the display side MPU 122 to specify whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48 .

If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S908 whether or not an execution permission command has been received. The execution permission command is sent from the sound and light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 in order to permit the execution of the effect corresponding to the operation when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. sent. If the execution permission command has been received, in step S909, operation effect data corresponding to the content of the current operation effect is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. As a result, after the next image update timing, the operation effect is started.

In addition, in the data table for the game round or the opening/closing execution mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 can be executed, the data of the contents when the effect operation device 48 is not operated are set as the contents of the task. ing. Therefore, when the effect operating device 48 is not operated during the effective period, the display control is performed according to the content of the task as it is, so that the effect at the time of non-operation is performed. Further, the content of the operation presentation is specifically arbitrary, but for example, there is a configuration in which at least one of an effect image, a character, and a moving image that do not appear in the presentation when no operation is performed is displayed.

After executing the process of step S909, in step S910, after setting the operation effect flag provided in the display side RAM 124 to "1", the corresponding process for each book ends. The operation effect flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the display side MPU 122 is in a situation where an operation effect should be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, in step S911, after executing the other handling process, the corresponding handling process for this book ends. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demonstration start command has been received. Executes the process of writing to

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), when a negative determination is made in step S702 or after the process of step S703 is executed, pointer update process is executed in step S704. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This enables the display-side MPU 122 to grasp the processing necessary to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing.

In the following step S705, task processing is executed. In the task processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. If the additional data does not exist, in step S1002, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and in the subsequent step S1003, according to the read task data, one frame corresponding to the current update timing is generated. In order to display a minute image, necessary parameters are calculated in order to issue a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 . After that, the task processing ends.

On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the additional data is additional data for the image of the task data. . If it is additional data, in step S1005, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and in subsequent step S1006, according to the read task data and additional data, correspond to the current update timing. In order to display an image for one frame, necessary parameters are calculated in order to issue a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 . After that, the task processing ends. Incidentally, the case where the processing of steps S1005 and S1006 is executed includes the case where a notification character image is added.

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, in step S1007 the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and in subsequent step S1008, according to the read additional data, 1 corresponding to the update timing of this time. In order to display an image for a frame, necessary parameters are calculated in order to issue a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 . After that, the task processing ends. Incidentally, the case where the processing of steps S1007 and S1008 is executed includes the case where an operation effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 16), after executing the task processing in step S705, in step S706, the command data is stored in the command output area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. Determine if it exists. If command data exists, it means that it is time to output the command, so command setting processing is executed in step S707.

In the command setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is the timing corresponding to the execution of the fixed effect on the pattern display device 31 . The fixed effect is a effect for notifying that the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result at a timing prior to the timing of displaying the stop result. There are a plurality of types of execution timings of the fixed effects in the symbol display device 31, for example, there are timings during the execution of the advance notice display, timings during the execution of the normal ready-to-win, and timings during the execution of the super ready-to-win. In addition, in the data table of FIG. 18, as the timing during the execution of Super Reach, the confirmation effect in the symbol display device 31 is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, this setting process is terminated after transmitting a confirmation execution command to the sound and light side MPU 112 in step S1102. The confirmation execution command includes information indicating that the confirmation effect is to be performed in the pattern display device 31 . Further, the confirmation execution command includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the confirmation effect should be started. As a result, even if the confirmation execution command is transmitted at a timing prior to the start timing of the confirmation effect, the sound and light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the confirmation effect on the pattern display device 31, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 can be started.

It should be noted that the fixed execution command is set to be output once at most in one pattern data table. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation effect from occurring a plurality of times on the symbol display device 31 in one game cycle. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the fixed execution command can be output multiple times in one pattern data table.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not it is time to start the valid operation period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the setting process ends after transmitting an operation effective start command to the sound and light side MPU 112 in step S1104. The operation validating start command includes information indicating that the operation of the effect operating device 48 should be validated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not the operation present flag of the display-side RAM 124 is set to "1". If "1" is set in the flag indicating that there is an operation, in step S1106 an operation enable command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112, and then this setting process is terminated. The operation valid command includes information indicating that the operation of the effect operation device 48 was within the valid period. Note that if an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, the operation existence flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1105, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the operation effect flag of the display side RAM 124 is set to "1". When the operation effect flag is set to "1", in step S1108, after transmitting the operation effect command to the sound and light side MPU 112, this setting process is terminated. The operation effect command includes information indicating that an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 is to be performed, and information on the type of operation effect. Further, the operation effect command includes information indicating after how many frames the operation effect should be started from the output timing of the command. As a result, even if the operation effect command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the operation effect, the sound and light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the operation effect in the pattern display device 31, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 can be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1107, this setting process ends after executing other command transmission processes in step S1109. In the other command transmission process, a command indicating that the game round effect should be started, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, and a command indicating that super reach should be started. Command indicating that the variation should be ended Command indicating that the opening and closing execution mode effect should be started Command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started A command indicating what to do, a command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, etc. are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112 according to respective timings.

In this case, a command indicating that the notice display should start, a command indicating that normal reach should start, a command indicating that super reach should start, a command indicating that opening and closing execution mode effects should start, a round The command indicating that the game effect should be started, the command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started, and the command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of effect. include.

In addition, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that variation should be ended, and a round game effect The command indicating to start includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command should start the target effect. As a result, even if each command is transmitted at a timing prior to the start timing of the target effect, the sound and light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the pattern display device 31 and transmits various light emitting units. It becomes possible to start the target effects in the groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 .

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), if a negative determination is made in step S706 or after the process of step S707 is executed, the drawing list output process is executed in step S708, and then this V interrupt process is executed. exit.

In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 125 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 125 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 127 according to this drawing list. The VDP 125 outputs a signal to the pattern display device 31 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, one frame of image is displayed on the pattern display device 31 .

<Display side command correspondence processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, display-side command handling processing executed in step S504 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) in the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing display-side command handling processing.

First, in step S1201, a command indicating that the effect of the game round should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the opening/closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started, and an ending. It is determined whether or not it has received either a command indicating that the presentation should be started or a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started. If any one of these commands has been received, in step S1202, light emission data reading processing and sound output data reading processing are executed. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the corresponding effect in the pattern display device 31 has already been executed, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data and the sound output data read in step S1202 is , will be started immediately. The light emission data reading process and the sound output data reading process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a confirmation execution command has been received from the display side MPU 122. FIG. When the confirmation execution command has been received, in step S1208, readout processing of light emission data at the time of confirmation effect and readout processing of sound output data at the time of confirmation effect are executed. Details of these readout processes will be described later. By executing the light emitting data and sound output data reading process in this way, the confirmation effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are executed thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not a command to start super reach has been received from the display side MPU 122. FIG. When an affirmative determination is made at step S1204, at step S1205, by confirming the game result information stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM 114, a jackpot result occurs in the current game round. determine whether or not to When a big hit result occurs, in step S1206, lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to generate a fixed effect. In the lottery process, if the result is a low-probability jackpot result, the winning will be decided with a probability of 1/20, and if the result is a high-probability jackpot, the winning will be decided with a probability of 1/5. to run. In addition, it is not limited to this, and in the lottery process of the fixed production, not only the lottery of whether to execute the fixed production, but also the type of the fixed production is determined by lottery. good. After that, in step S1207, it is determined whether or not the winning is confirmed effect, and in the case of winning confirmed effect, in step S1208, light emission data reading processing at the time of confirmed effect and sound output data at the time of confirmed effect are performed. read processing. Details of these readout processes will be described later. By executing the light emitting data and sound output data reading process in this way, the confirmation effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are executed thereafter.

On the other hand, if the command indicating that super reach should be started has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S1204 and the process of step S1208 is not executed. Further, even if the command indicating that the super reach should be started is received, if the game round this time is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1205 and the processing of step S1208 is performed. don't run In addition, even if the game round this time is a jackpot result, even if the lottery process for the fixed effect results in a loss, a negative determination is made in step S1207 and the process of step S1208 is not executed.

Here, when the fixed effect is executed in the pattern display device 31, the fixed effect is executed in the pattern display device 31 while the command data of the fixed execution command is set in the pattern data table. In the case where it is not possible and the determination effect can be executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, the command data of the corresponding command is not set in the pattern data table. Instead, the timing at which the confirmation effect is executed only in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is set as the start of super reach, and a command indicating that super reach should be started is displayed. Triggered by the transmission from the side MPU 122, the sound and light side MPU 112 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation effect. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set command data indicating execution timings of fixed effects that are not executed by the pattern display device 31 in the pattern data table, thereby reducing the data capacity of the pattern data table. And facilitation of design is achieved.

On the other hand, when a command indicating that super reach should be started is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the sound and light side MPU 112 determines whether or not the current game turn will result in a big win. The pattern display device 31 determines the execution of the non-interlocking selective confirmation effect on the condition that the game round results in a big win. As a result, in the configuration for reducing the data capacity of the pattern data table and facilitating the setting as described above, it is possible to prevent the fixed effect from being executed in game rounds that do not result in a big win.

Further, even in a game round resulting in a big win, execution of a selective fixed effect that is not interlocked with the symbol display device 31 is not decided unless a fixed effect win is won in the lottery process of the fixed effect. Thus, in the above configuration, it is possible to give irregularity to the execution of the fixed effect.

Furthermore, when the fixed effect is executed in the pattern display device 31, the execution of the fixed effect in the various light emitting part groups 71 to 73 and the speaker part 45 is decided without executing the lottery processing of the fixed effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution of the confirmation effect between the pattern display device 31 and the various light emitting section groups 71 to 73 and the speaker section 45 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1208 is executed, then in step S1209 It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the operation start timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, then in step S1210, setting processing for movable object presentation is executed. In the setting processing of the movable object effect, various data settings are performed for starting the movable object effect corresponding to the command currently received from the display side MPU 122 . Details of the processing contents of the setting processing will be described later. Since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the operation start timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the movable object effect using the data set in step S1210 is performed only when the image display of the corresponding effect is performed. will be started synchronously with the start of

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the process of step S1210 is executed, in step S1211, whether or not a command corresponding to the command to stop the disk movable objects 62a and 62b has been received from the display side MPU 122. judge. The movable object production using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is executed in the game cycle, and the output information of the command for starting the movable object production and the stop for stopping the movable object production are displayed. The output information of the command corresponding to the instruction is preset in the pattern data table for the game cycle. In addition, there are a plurality of types of execution periods for the movable object rendering using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and pattern data tables are set according to the types of these execution periods. , the setting modes of the output information of the command for start and the command for stop are different.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, the stop command flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". The stop command flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that the disk effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b should be stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after the process of step S1212 is executed, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not it is time to update the light emission data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, light emission data reading processing is executed in step S1214. In this case, since the processing for starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data read out in step S1214 is performed only after the image display of the corresponding effect. will be started synchronously with the start of The light emission data reading process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1213, or after the process of step S1214 is executed, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not it is time to update the sound output data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, a process of reading sound output data is executed in step S1216. In this case, since the processing for starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the effect using the sound output data read out in step S1216 is executed only when the corresponding effect image is displayed. It will be started in synchronization with the start of display. Note that the processing for reading the sound output data will be described later in detail.

If the process of step S1202 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, or if the process of step S1216 is executed, then in step S1217 it is determined whether or not an operation rendering command has been received. . If no operation effect command is received, the present display-side command handling process is terminated. If an operation rendering command has been received, the display side command handling process is terminated after the operation system handling process is executed in step S1218.

The operation system correspondence processing in step S1218 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not an operation valid start command has been received. If the operation valid start command has been received, the operation valid period is set in step S1302, and then the operation system support processing is terminated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not an operation enable command has been received. If the operation valid command has been received, in step S1304, an execution permission command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and after canceling the operation valid period, this operation system correspondence processing ends. By canceling the valid operation period, a negative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not an operation effect command has been received. If an operation effect command has been received, in step S1306, light emission data readout processing and sound output data readout processing are executed, and then this operation system corresponding processing ends. These readout processes will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it means that the valid operation end command has been received. In this case, in step S1307, after canceling the effective period of operation, this operation-related processing ends.

<Details of communication when the operation effect is executed>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 24, the content of communication when the operation effect is executed will be described.

FIG. 24(a) shows a period during which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is set to be effective in the pattern data table read by the display side MPU 122, and FIG. The period during which the operation of the device 48 is set to be valid, FIG. 24(c) shows the operation status of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 24(d) shows whether or not the operation effect is executed, and FIG. 24(e). indicates the contents of the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound and light side MPU 112, and FIG.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the valid operation period set in the pattern data table is started, and as shown in FIG. An operation effective start command is transmitted to the optical side MPU 112 . As a result, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the effect operating device 48 is operated in the sound and light side MPU 112 during the effective period.

After that, in both the pattern data table and the sound and light side MPU 112, the operation of the effect operation device 48 is started at the timing of t3, which is the effective period of the effect operation device 48. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24( f ), the operation generation command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 . Since the operation generation command is transmitted in the pattern data table during the effective period of the effect operation device 48, as shown in FIG. An operation valid command is sent. As a result, the validity period of the operation of the effect operation device 48 is canceled in the sound and light side MPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 24(f), at timing t5, an execution permission command permitting execution of the operation effect is transmitted from the sound/light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122. FIG.

By receiving the execution permission command, the display-side MPU 122 starts the operation effect as shown in FIG. It transmits to optical side MPU112. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24(c), at timing t7, the operation of the effect operation device 48 is terminated, and at time t8, as shown in FIG. It is the end timing of the operation effective period of the operation device 48 .

As described above, the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the effect operation device 48 are specified by the display side MPU 122 based on the data table read by the display side MPU 122, and the respective timings are determined from the display side MPU 122. is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112, each timing is specified in the sound and light side MPU 112. By adopting such a configuration, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not need to have a data table for uniquely identifying the operation effective period of the effect operation device 48, and the data capacity can be reduced.

The display-side MPU 122 performs display control of moving image display on the pattern display device 31, while the sound-light-side MPU 112 performs light emission control of various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45. Therefore, the processing load of the sound and light side MPU 112 is relatively lighter than that of the display side MPU 122 . In this case, the sound and light side MPU 112 monitors whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated, thereby distributing the processing load.

The sound and light side MPU 112 does not monitor the operation signal from the effect operation device 48 until it receives the operation effective start command from the display side MPU 122, and monitors the operation signal by receiving the operation effective start command. It is a configuration to do. As a result, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not need to constantly monitor the operation signal from the effect operation device 48, thereby reducing the monitoring load.

The sound and light side MPU 112 transmits an operation generation command when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, and the display side MPU 122 refers to the pattern data table when receiving the operation generation command. , it is determined whether the timing at which the operation generation command is received is within the operation valid period defined in the pattern data table. As a result, not only the sound and light side MPU 112 but also the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is during the operation effective period. It is possible to accurately monitor whether or not an operation has been performed.

When the display side MPU 122 receives an operation generation command from the sound and light side MPU 112 during the operation valid period, the display side MPU 122 transmits an operation valid command indicating that the operation is valid to the sound and light side MPU 112 . Then, the sound and light side MPU 112 cancels the monitoring of whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated by receiving the operation enable command. As a result, the sound and light side MPU 112 can cancel the monitoring of whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated without waiting for the start of the operation effect, and the monitoring load on the sound and light side MPU 112 can be reduced.

When receiving the operation enable command from the display side MPU 122 , the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122 . When the display-side MPU 122 receives the execution permission command, the operation presentation is started. As a result, the display-side MPU 122 can start the operation presentation after confirming that the sound/light-side MPU 112 has normally received the operation enable command.

The display side MPU 122 transmits an operation effect command to the sound and light side MPU 112 when starting the operation effect, and the sound and light side MPU 112 receives the operation effect command, thereby corresponding to the operation effect executed in the pattern display device 31. Then, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 also execute the operation effect. This makes it possible to reliably synchronize these operation presentations.

<Light emission control in sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the details of light emission control of various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 executed by the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described.

The sound and light side MPU 112 uses the light emission data group 151 stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 113 when performing light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 . When using this, part of the light emission data group 151 is read out to the light emission data area 162 provided in the display side RAM 124 and used. The light emission data group 151 and the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. FIG. FIG. 25(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the light emission data group 151, and FIG. 25(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the light emission data area 162. FIG. 26(a) to (d) and FIG. 27 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of each data included in the light emission data group 151. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the lighting data group 151 includes a palette data group 151a, a start position data group 151b, a total time data group 151c, a duration data group 151d, and a list data group 151e. , a group data group 151f and a data selection table 151g.

The palette data group 151a includes a large number of palette data indicating switching patterns of light emitting colors. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(a), palette data 0 defines a switching pattern based on two luminescent colors. Specifically, a pattern of switching from the blue emission color to the white emission color is determined, and if the palette data 0 continues to be selected, the white emission color is followed by the blue emission color. It will return to color. Therefore, in the palette data 0, a switching pattern of the luminescent colors is defined as blue->white->blue->white->blue-> .

Palette data 1 defines a switching pattern with five luminescent colors, and palette data 2 defines a switching pattern with three luminescent colors. However, in the palette data 1, one cycle of the switching pattern is defined as a pattern in which each of the five set emission colors is displayed once, whereas in the palette data 2, one of the switching patterns The circumference is defined as a pattern in which at least one of the three set luminescent colors is displayed twice or more. Specifically, in the palette data 1, a switching pattern of luminescent colors is defined as red→blue→green→yellow→white→red→blue→green→ . A switching pattern of luminescent colors is defined as red->green->blue->green->blue->red->blue->red->. Note that there are many palette data other than the palette data 0 to 2 described above.

In each palette data, serial number identification information is determined on a one-to-one basis for each luminescent color data to be switched. The identification information corresponds to start position data indicating the order of emission color to start emission control of one of the LEDs 71a to 73a using the palette data.

In the start position data group 151b, for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 subject to light emission control, when switching the emission color using any of the palette data, the target There are a large number of start position data indicating from which order of the luminescent colors to start the light emission control from among the series of luminescent colors defined in the palette data. Here, when the sound and light side MPU 112 performs light emission control of each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, palette data and start position data are basically set in units of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. FIG. In this case, the start position data is data indicating the start position of the luminescent color for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The numbers are different. Therefore, the start position data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having different numbers of LEDs 71a to 73a.

The start position data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 26(b). Start position data 0 and start position data 1 shown in FIG. 26B are examples of start position data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 having 16 LEDs 72a. In each of the start position data 0 and the start position data 1, the start position numbers are determined in one-to-one correspondence with bits 0 to 15, respectively. In this case, each of bits 0 to 15 corresponds to one of the 1st LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. Then, when starting the effect of switching the luminescent color in each LED 72a, the luminescent color in the order corresponding to the start position number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the palette data to be used, and the specified luminescent color is specified. The luminescent colors are switched sequentially from .

For example, when the start position data 0 is applied to the palette data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from white, and the ninth LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a. starts in blue. On the other hand, when the start position data 1 is applied to the palette data 0, the 1st LED 72a to the 8th LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from blue, and the 9th LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a start from blue. starts with white.

The total time data group 151c includes a large number of total time data that can specify the total time that one palette data is used. For example, if the time required for one cycle of the switching pattern of the selected palette data is shorter than the total time, the switching pattern is repeated until the total time elapses.

The duration data group 151d includes a large number of duration data that can specify the duration of a state in which one emission color is lit when the emission color is switched according to the selected palette data. For example, when palette data 0 in FIG. 26(a) is selected and duration data of 2 seconds is selected, a state in which the emission color of one LED is maintained in blue for 2 seconds and a state in which the emission color is maintained in white , and the state of being maintained for 2 seconds are repeated.

A large number of list data exist in the list data group 151e. While one palette data is basically used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, as an exception, when a plurality of palette data are used simultaneously for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 , the types of the plurality of palette data are defined in one list data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in list data 0, palette data 0, palette data 1, and palette data 2 are set as palette data to be used. In list data 1, palette data 10, palette data 11, palette data 12, and palette data 13 are set as palette data to be used.

In each list data, a serial list number is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the pallet data to be used. The list number indicates which palette data is used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a when the list data is used to select the palette data to be used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. It corresponds to the specified data indicating whether

A large number of group data exist in the group data group 151f. When list data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, group data includes each palette set in the list data for each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Data indicating which of the data is used is set. Here, the group data is data individually indicating palette data to be used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. are different. Therefore, the group data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having different numbers of LEDs 71a to 73a.

The group data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 26(d). Group data 0 and group data 1 shown in FIG. 26(d) are examples of group data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 having 16 LEDs 72a. In each of group data 0 and group data 1, list numbers are determined in one-to-one correspondence with bits 0 to 15, respectively. In this case, each of bits 0 to 15 corresponds to one of the 1st LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. When selecting the palette data to be used for each LED 72a, the palette data in the order corresponding to the list number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the list data to be used, and the specified palette data is used. do.

For example, when the group data 0 is applied to the list data 0, the palette data 0 is selected for use from the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the ninth LED 72a to 16 Palette data 1 is selected as the object to be used up to the th LED 72a. On the other hand, when the group data 1 is applied to the list data 1, the palette data 10 is selected for use from the first LED 72a to the fourth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the fifth LED 72a to 8 The palette data 11 is selected as the target for use up to the th LED 72a, the palette data 12 is selected as the target for use from the 9th LED 72a to the 12th LED 72a, and the palette data 13 is selected for the 13th LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a. is selected for use.

The data selection table 151g is data in which combinations of data used for light emission control of each of the light emitting unit groups 71-73 are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, in the data selection table 151g, request numbers used for identifying combinations of data to be used are set for the number of types of the combinations. Correspondingly, the type of palette data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, and the type of group data are set.

However, as already explained, while one palette data is basically used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, as an exception, a plurality of palette data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. data are used simultaneously. In the data selection table 151g, request numbers corresponding to basic combinations and request numbers corresponding to exceptional combinations are individually set. Specifically, request numbers 0 to 10 correspond to basic combinations, and the basic combinations include the type of pallet data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, and the type of duration data. The type of list data and the type of group data are not defined. On the other hand, request numbers 120 to 130 correspond to exception combinations, and the exception combinations include the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, The type of group data is defined, but the type of palette data is not defined.

Next, the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(b).

In the light emission data area 162, each data included in the combination specified by using the request number is read out from the data selection table 151g, and light emission data is created by using each of these data. When the light emission data is used for a game round, it corresponds to a part of the effect of one game round, and when it is used for the opening and closing execution mode, it corresponds to a part of the effect of the one opening and closing execution mode. Yes. On the other hand, when it is used for notification, it corresponds to the entire notification.

Various types of light emission data are created in the light emission data area 162, and these light emission data are stored in different areas in the light emission data area 162 for each predetermined division. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c.

Light emission data for normal effect is stored in the base area 162a. As a situation in which the light emission data for the normal effect is used, for example, when a game round is being performed on the pattern display device 31, there is a situation in which the advance notice display and the ready-to-win display are not performed. In the base area 162a, areas corresponding to the first light-emitting portion group 71, the second light-emitting portion group 72 and the third light-emitting portion group 73 on a one-to-one basis are provided, and correspond to the respective light emitting portion groups 71 to 73. Light emission data for normal effects to be performed is stored separately.

In the base area 162a, for example, in the case of light emission data for a game round, only one piece of light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game round. Execution of the luminescent color switching pattern using the one luminescent data is repeated. Further, for example, in the case of light emission data for the opening/closing execution mode, only one piece of light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening/closing execution mode. Execution of the luminescent color switching pattern using the one luminescent data is repeated. In these cases, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data in the combined data for creating the light emission data.

However, it is not limited to this, and during one game round, a plurality of light emission data for normal effects can be set, such as light emission data for normal effects on the first half side and light emission data for normal effects on the second half side. Light emission data for normal effects other than advance notice display and ready-to-reach display, light emission data for normal notice display, light emission data for ready-to-reach display, and light emission data for final stop display and may be set. Such a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data for normal effects can be set during a series of effects may be applied to the opening/closing execution mode.

The interrupt area 162b stores data used for the light emission control for the interrupt effect, which takes priority over the light emission control for the normal effect. A situation in which the light emission data for the interruption effect is used is, for example, a situation in which an advance notice display or a ready-to-win display is performed while a game cycle is being performed on the symbol display device 31 . In addition, the situation in which the light emission data for the interruption effect is used includes the situation in which the fixed effect is performed. Furthermore, there is a situation in which a promotion effect is performed during the opening/closing execution mode. The interrupt area 162b is provided with areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The light emission data for the interruption effect to be performed is stored separately.

In the interrupt area 162b, for example, if it is light emission data for a game round, there are a plurality of light emission data that can be stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game round. In each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, these plural pieces of light emission data are appropriately rewritten during the rotation. Further, for example, in the case of the light emission data for the opening/closing execution mode, the plurality of light emission data are appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening/closing execution mode. These rewrites are performed according to the priority among the light emission data. The content of this rewriting priority will be described later in detail.

The notification area 162c stores data used for notification light emission control that takes precedence over interruption effect light emission control. The situation in which the light emission data for notification is used is when the occurrence of the notification object event in the pachinko machine 10 is detected and the notification command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 . In the notification area 162c, areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis are provided, and correspond to the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. Light emission data for reporting to be performed is stored individually.

In the notification area 162c, only one piece of light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 when an event to be notified occurs. The execution of the luminescent color switching pattern using the data is repeated. In this case, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data in the combination data for creating the light emission data. In addition, the situation in which the notification light emission data is used continues until a release command is received from the main MPU 92 .

<Reading process of emission data of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission data reading process of steps S1202, S1208 and S1212 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission data reading process is performed individually for each of the first light emitting unit group 71 , the second light emitting unit group 72 , and the third light emitting unit group 73 . In the following explanation of the light emission data reading process, the process for the second light emitting section group 72 will be taken as an example, but the same is basically true for the first light emitting section group 71 and the third light emitting section group 73 .

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the area to which light emission data is written is the notification area 162c. If it is the notification area 162c, in step S1402, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the notification command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is selected. Corresponding various data are read from the sound and light side ROM 113 . Then, in step S1403, data development processing is executed using the read various data, and light emission data is written in the notification area 162c. In this case, the same type of data is read regardless of the contents of the notification command being received, so the same light emission data is written. In other words, regardless of the event to be notified, the second light emitting unit group 72 gives the notification in the same manner.

After that, in step S1404, after setting the notification setting flag on the light emission side provided in the sound and light RAM 114 to 1, this reading process ends. The notification setting flag on the light emission side is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 whether or not the light emission data exists in the notification area 162c. The state in which the notification setting flag of the light emitting side is set to 1 is cleared by the cancellation setting process of step S627 of the main side command handling process (FIG. 15) by receiving the cancellation command from the main side MPU 92. FIG. Also, at this time, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the area to which the light emission data is written is the base area 162a. If it is the base area 162a, in step S1406, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is corresponded to. The various data thus obtained are read out from the ROM 113 on the sound and light side. Then, in step S1407, data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the base area 162a. After that, the read processing is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the light emission data to be written this time corresponds to the fixed effect. When it corresponds to the confirmed effect, in step S1409, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number for the confirmed effect this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is corresponded. The various data thus obtained are read out from the ROM 113 on the sound and light side. Then, in step S1410, data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1411, the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to 1, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the light emission data for the fixed effect is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113. After writing to the RAM 114, the read processing ends.

The interrupt setting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 whether light emission data exists in the interrupt area 162b. Further, the light emitting side priority data already exists when there is an instruction to write new light emitting data to the interrupt area 162b in a situation where the light emitting data already exists in the interrupt area 162b. This is data for determining the priority when determining whether to use the light emission data as it is as the light emission data for interruption or to use the light emission data newly instructed to be written as the light emission data for interruption. In the light-emitting side priority data, the light-emitting data corresponding to the fixed effect has the highest priority, and after that, with respect to the effect for the game round, the light-emitting data with the higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect has the higher priority. The degree is set to be high, and regarding the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the priority is set so that the light emission data corresponding to the promotion effect is higher.

If a negative determination is made in step S1408, in step S1412, the light emission side priority data P1 corresponding to the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b is read, and in the following step S1413, the current writing is performed. The light emission side priority data P2 corresponding to the designated light emission data is read. Then, in step S1414, by determining whether or not P2>P1, the light emission data currently instructed to be written has priority over the light emission data currently set in the interrupt area 162b. Determine whether the degree is high.

If no light emission data is set in the current interrupt area 162b, an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, and the light emission data currently instructed to be written is written in the interrupt area 162b.

A negative determination in step S1414 means that the current light emission data set in the interrupt area 162b has a higher priority. Therefore, the read processing ends without writing the light emission data, which is instructed to be written this time, to the interrupt area 162b.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, it means that the light emission data currently instructed to write has a higher priority. Therefore, in step S1415, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number to which the current write instruction is directed is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the various data corresponding to the specified combination type is selected. Read from the side ROM 113 . Then, in step S1416, data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1417, the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound and light RAM 114 is set to 1, and the light emission priority data corresponding to the newly written light emission data is read from the sound and light ROM 113. After writing to the side RAM 114, the read processing is terminated.

Note that the request number referred to in step S1415 is read from the command received from the display side MPU 122 when the process of step S1415 is executed in response to the command, and is described later in the sound and light side MPU 112. When the process of step S1415 is executed due to the execution of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), it is set in the movable object control process.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the data expansion process activated in steps S1403, S1407, S1410 and S1416.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not data to be expanded is a basic combination. If it is a basic combination, in step S1502, the value of the creation target bit provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "0". As a result, the first LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 becomes a target for creating light emission data.

In the subsequent step S1503, the start position number of the creation target bit is obtained from the read start position data corresponding to the request number. Then, in step S1504, by referring to the palette data read out in association with the request number, the switching pattern is read based on the start position number acquired in step S1503.

In step S1505, the duration data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1506, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set. Here, the sound and light side MPU 112 is configured to execute light emission control processing by timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) that is started at a 4 msec cycle. Update. Therefore, in steps S1505 and S1506, the pointer information is converted so that the quotient obtained by dividing the duration data and the total time data by 4 msec becomes the respective final pointer information.

Incidentally, when data with no time limit is set as the total time data, it is assumed that the total time data does not exist, and data for one cycle of the luminescent color switching pattern is created as the light emission data. On the other hand, when data other than data without time limit, that is, data with time limit is set as the total time data, when the time corresponding to the total time data has passed, the final pointer information and The switching pattern of the luminescent color for the total time data is set so that In this case, if the total time data exceeds the time for one cycle of the luminescent color switching pattern due to the relationship with the duration data, the luminescent color switching pattern for the period exceeding one cycle is set. becomes.

By executing the processing of steps S1503 to S1506, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current creation target bit value is created. After that, in step S1507, 1 is added to the value of the creation target bit, thereby updating the creation target of the light emission data to the LED in the next order. Then, in step S 1508 , it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1508, light emission data is created by executing the processing of steps S1503 to S1506 for the LED corresponding to the updated creation target bit value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1508, in step S1509, each light emission data created this time is written in the write target area among the base area 162a, interrupt area 162b, and notification area 162c. After that, the data development process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the value of the generation target bit in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "0". As a result, the first LED 72A of the second light emitting unit group 72 becomes a target for creating light emission data.

In the following step S1511, the list number of bits to be created is obtained from the group data read in association with the request number. Then, in step S1512, the palette data corresponding to the list number acquired in step S1511 is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113 by referring to the list data read in association with the request number.

After that, in step S1513, the start position number of the creation target bit is obtained from the start position data read out in association with the request number, and in step S1514, the palette data read out in step S1512 is referred to, A switching pattern is read based on the start position number obtained in step S1513. In subsequent step S1515, the duration data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1516, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set.

By executing the processes of steps S1511 to S1516, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current creation target bit value is created. In particular, in this case, the data of the combination read out corresponding to the request number is an exceptional combination, and the light emission data is created using the group data and the list data. , it is possible to create light emission data based on different palette data for each, and diversification of light emission patterns is achieved.

After that, in step S1517, 1 is added to the value of the creation target bit to update the creation target of the light emission data to the next LED in the order. Then, in step S 1518 , it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1518, light emission data is created by executing the processing of steps S1511 to S1516 for the LED corresponding to the updated creation target bit value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1518, in step S1519, each light emission data created this time is written in the write target area among the base area 162a, interrupt area 162b, and notification area 162c. After that, the data development process is terminated.

An example of light emission data created when the above data development process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 shows light emission data created when palette data 0 in FIG. 26(a) and start position data 0 in FIG. It is an example of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a of the light emission data area 162. FIG. In this case, since the luminescent color is set twice in the palette data 0, the pointer information is set in sequence so that the final pointer information is the number corresponding to twice the time corresponding to the duration data. be done. More specifically, in the palette data 0, a switching pattern of emission colors from blue to white is set, and 4 sec is set as the duration data. Pointer information is set with serial numbers. Further, the LED 72a corresponding to bits 0 to 7 emits blue light for 4 seconds and then emits white light for 4 seconds. After the luminous color is continued for 4 seconds, emission data is created in which the blue luminous color is continued for 4 seconds.

<Light emission control processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission control processing of step S505 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission control process is performed individually for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. FIG. In the following explanation of the light emission control processing, the processing for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be taken as an example, but the same is basically true for the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73 as well.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the notification setting flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". When the notification setting flag is set to "1", in step S1602, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 emits light based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the notification area 162c. Control.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the interrupt setting flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". When the interrupt setting flag is set to "1", in step S1604, the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 are caused to emit light based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the interrupt area 162b. Control.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603, light emission of each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is controlled in step S1605 based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the base area 162a.

In other words, light emission data can be stored simultaneously in each of the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162. Of these, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c has the highest priority in light emission control. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the notification over the execution of the performance, and it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that an event to be notified such as an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Further, when the light emission data is not stored in the notification area 162c, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is prioritized next in the light emission control. As a result, execution of a fixed effect or a highly anticipated effect is given priority, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect in the light emitting unit groups 71-73.

After executing the processing of step S1602, step S1604, or step S1605, in step S1606, the pointer information of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c is the final pointer. It is determined whether or not there is light emission data as information. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the area corresponding to the final pointer information is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c. If it is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c, in step S1608, the pointer information of the light emission data, which is the final pointer information, is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the restoration process, the pointer information of the light emission data to be restored is repeatedly updated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1607, then in step S1609 the interrupt setting flag of the sound/light RAM 114 is cleared to "0" and the interrupt area 162b is cleared. That is, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is cleared by becoming the final pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1606, when the process of step S1608 is executed, or when the process of step S1609 is executed, in step S1610, the base area 162a, interrupt area 162b, and The updating process of the pointer information is executed for each of the notification areas 162c. As a result, in the next process of the light emission control process, the light emission control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, the pointer information updating process does not process the light emission data for which the process of returning to the start pointer information in step S1608 is performed. After that, the main light emission control process ends.

<How light emission is controlled>
Next, how light emission control is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 32(a) shows the execution status of the normal effect, FIG. 32(b) shows the execution status of the ready-to-win effect, FIG. 32(c) shows the execution status of the fixed effect, and FIG. 32(d) is for notification. FIG. 32(e) shows whether or not a command indicating that light emission data should be stored in the interrupt area 162b (hereinafter referred to as an interrupt setting command) is received. In addition, in the following description, the light emission effects in the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described. In addition, in FIG. 32, the actually selected light emission control modes are enclosed.

By storing the light emission data in the base area 162a at the timing of t1, the normal effect is started in the second light emission section group 72 as shown in FIG. 32(a). Then, by receiving the interrupt setting command as shown in FIG. 32(e) at the timing t2 in which the normal effect is being executed, light emission data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Then, the normal effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 32(a), and the ready-to-win effect is started in the second light emitting portion group 72 as shown in FIG. 32(b). However, even in a situation where the ready-to-win effect is being performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a Updates will continue.

After that, at the timing of t3 when the ready-to-win effect is being executed, an interrupt setting command corresponding to the fixed effect is received as shown in FIG. 32(e). Since the light emission data corresponding to the fixed effect has the highest priority among the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data corresponding to the fixed effect is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b, and FIG. As shown in , the confirmation effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 . In this case, the light emission data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect stored in the interruption area 162b is erased. Further, even in a situation where the fixed effect is being performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is displayed. Updates will continue.

After that, at the timing of t4, which is the situation in which the fixed effect is being executed, an interrupt setting command is received as shown in FIG. 32(e). However, since the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the effect instructed by the interrupt setting command is lower than the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the fixed effect, the interrupt area 162b is not overwritten, and the fixed effect is used as it is.

After that, by receiving the notification command at the timing of t5, which is the situation in which the fixed effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the notification is stored in the notification area 162c. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the confirmation effect is stopped, and as shown in FIG. However, even in a situation where notification is performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a cannot be updated. , and pointer updating of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is continued.

Thereafter, by receiving a release command at timing t6, the notification area 162c is cleared and the notification setting flag on the light emitting side is cleared to "0". As a result, the notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 32(d), and the confirmation effect using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is resumed as shown in FIG. 32(c). In this case, even though the notification is being performed, the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is continued. It becomes the same as the light emission mode of the fixed effect at the timing when there is no light. Therefore, even if an interrupt of notification occurs, it is possible to synchronize the light emission mode of the fixed effect on the second light emitting unit group 72 and the display mode of the fixed effect on the pattern display device 31 after the timing when the notification is canceled. It becomes possible.

After that, at the timing of t7, when the fixed effect ends, the interrupt area 162b is cleared and the interrupt setting flag is cleared to "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the fixed effect is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 32(a), the normal effect using the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is resumed. Then, the normal effect ends at the timing of t8.

<Sound output control in sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 executed by the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described.

The sound and light side MPU 112 uses the sound output data group 152 stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 113 when performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45 . When using this, a part of the sound output data group 152 is read into the sound output data area 163 provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 and used. These sound output data group 152 and sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the sound output data group 152, and FIG. 33(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output data area 163. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the sound output data group 152 includes a variation base data group 152a, a data group 152b at the start of the notice effect, a group 152c at the end of the notice effect, and a data group 152d at the time of normal reach. , data group 152e at the time of super reach, data group 152f at the time of fixed effect, data group 152g at the time of fluctuation end, data group 152h at the time of notification occurrence, opening data group 152i, round data group 152j, and interval data There are at least a group 152k, an ending data group 152l, a promotion effect data group 152m, and a curtain board effect data group 152n.

The variation base data group 152a includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting a piece of music that is repeated in a situation where no advance notice display or ready-to-win display is performed during a game. The data group 152b at the start of the announcement effect includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music from the start of the announcement display to the end of the announcement display. The data group 152c at the end of the announcement effect includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music when the announcement display ends. The normal reach data group 152d includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting a piece of music that is repeated in the normal reach state. The super reach data group 152e includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or voice in a situation where super reach is being performed. The fixed effect data group 152f includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or voice in a situation where the fixed effect is being performed. The data group 152g at the end of variation includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music when the variation display of symbols is terminated during the game. The data group 152h at the time of notification includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting notification sound or voice for notification. The opening data group 152i includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where an opening effect is being performed in the opening/closing execution mode. In the round data group 152j, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in the situation where the effect during the round game is being performed in the open/close execution mode. The interval data group 152k includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where an effect is being performed during the interval in the open/close execution mode. The ending data group 152l includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or voice in a situation where the ending effect is being performed in the opening/closing execution mode. The promotion effect data group 152m includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or voice in a situation where the promotion effect is being performed in the opening/closing execution mode. The curtain plate effect data group 152n includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting sound effects when a third stage effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed during a game round.

In other words, in the sound output data group 152, the sound output data for the entire series of effects, such as the effect for the game cycle and the effect for the open/close execution mode, which is started at a predetermined trigger, is not set as it is. The sound output data for the entire series of effects is divided for each range in which the progress of the effects in the series of effects differs (for example, the range in which the types of characters appearing are different, or the range in which the variable display of patterns changes). is set. A plurality of types of sound output data are set for each divided data. Therefore, when effecting a game cycle or effecting an opening/closing execution mode, the divided data corresponding to the command transmitted from the main side MPU 92 or the display side MPU 122 is read, and sound output control is performed according to the read divided data. It will be done.

Incidentally, when the sound output data is developed in the sound and light side RAM 114, pointer information corresponding to the output duration for one cycle of the music, voice, or notification sound set in the sound output data, and pointer information corresponding to each cycle. and output content data corresponding to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis. A signal corresponding to the output content data set in correspondence with the pointer information is output to the speaker unit 45, and the content of the signal output is changed every time the pointer information is updated, so that the sound is output. A piece of music, voice, or notification sound corresponding to the data is output.

Next, the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(b).

The sound output data area 163 is provided with a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186 so that a plurality of sound output data can be simultaneously read and controlled. Specifically, 16 sound output areas 171 to 166 are provided. As a result, even if a read command for new sound output data is generated in a situation where sound output control is being performed using predetermined sound output data, the predetermined sound output data is in a state of being read out to the sound and light side RAM 114. , the new sound output data can be read out to the sound and light side RAM 114 . Also, the number of sound output areas 171 to 186 is set to be equal to or larger than the maximum number of sound output data for which a read command can be generated at the same time.

<Reading process of sound output data of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the sound output data reading process of steps S1202, S1208 and S1214 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not it is read processing when a notification command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, then in step S1702 the sound output data corresponding to the content of the received notification command is stored in the notification occurrence data group 152h in the sound output data group 152 of the sound and light ROM 113. read from inside. Then, in step S1703, the read sound output data is stored in the sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163, in which no sound output data is stored. Write to the upper area. After that, in step S1704, the notification sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read out this time is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113, and in step S1703 the corresponding relationship with the sound output area to be written is read. is written in the sound and light side RAM 114 in a state in which is identifiable.

The sound output side priority data indicates which sound output area should be subjected to sound output control when sound output data is stored in a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186 . This is the data for determining the priority when the light-side MPU 112 decides. In the sound output side priority data, the sound output data corresponding to the notification has the highest priority, and the sound output data corresponding to the fixed effect has the next highest priority. , It is set so that the sound output data with higher expectations for the jackpot result of the target effect has a higher priority, and for the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the sound output data corresponding to the promotion effect has priority. set to be high.

Incidentally, the sound output side priority data corresponds to the priority among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c in the light emission data area 162, and the light emission side priority data, and is prioritized in light emission control. It is configured such that the event that is executed as a control and the event that is executed with priority in the sound output control are the same. Therefore, the execution contents of the light emission control and the sound output control are the same.

In the subsequent step S1705, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data for notification has already been set in the sound and light side RAM 114 or not. If it has not already been set, this reading process is terminated as it is. If it has already been set, the process of adjusting the output start timing is executed in step S1706, and then the read process ends.

Here, in the notification by the speaker unit 45, a notification sound or notification voice corresponding to each event to be notified is output. In other words, in the notification occurrence data group 152h, the sound output data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the event that is the target of notification, and the event that is the target of notification has occurred repeatedly. In this case, the notification sound output data corresponding to each event are stored in different sound output areas. In this case, the sound output side priority data for each notification sound output data is set to have the same priority. In step S1706, by shifting the output start timing of each sound output data, All of the sound output data are made subject to sound output control. Specifically, the start pointer information is adjusted so that the newly set notification sound output data is subject to sound output control following the already set notification sound output data. In addition, in a situation where the notification state of the pachinko machine 10 is not canceled, the notification is repeated, but when a plurality of sound output data for notification are set, the notification for each different event continues. The output state is repeated.

Note that the sound output data for notification is cleared when a cancel command indicating that the event to be notified corresponding to the sound output data is canceled is received from the main MPU 92 . At this time, the sound output side priority data for notification is also cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not there are a plurality of sound output data to be read out this time. A sound corresponding to the contents of the moving image on the pattern display device 31 is output from the speaker unit 45. However, in the case where the notice display is performed in the effect for the game round, the start time of the notice display and the time of the notice display are changed. A different sound is output at the end. On the other hand, the display-side MPU 122 does not output a command to the sound/light-side MPU 112 at each timing, but outputs a command corresponding to the announcement display only at the timing corresponding to the start of the announcement display. Therefore, when the sound/light MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the notice display, it reads the sound output data corresponding to the start of the notice display and the sound output data corresponding to the end of the notice display.

Specifically, in step S1708, the front side sound output data is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound and light side ROM 113, and in step S1709, the read sound output data is stored in the sound output data area 163. Of the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186, the sound output area in which sound output data is not stored is written in the highest area. After that, in step S1710, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read out this time is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113, and in step S1709, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written. is written in the sound and light side RAM 114 in this state.

After that, in step S1711, the sound output data on the rear side is read out from the sound output data group 152 of the sound and light side ROM 113, and in step S1712, the read sound output data is transferred to the first sound in the sound output data area 163. Of the output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186, the sound output area in which the sound output data is not stored is written to the highest area. After that, in step S1713, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area targeted for writing in step S1712 can be specified. is written in the sound and light side RAM 114 in this state.

In the subsequent step S1714, the output standby flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for identifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that there is sound output data waiting to be subject to sound output control. In the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area in which the waiting sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the waiting sound output data is set. After that, the read processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, then in step S1715 the sound output data corresponding to the current reading process is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound and light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is In step S1716, among the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163, the sound output data is written to the highest area among the sound output areas in which sound output data is not stored. After that, in step S1717, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read out this time is read out from the sound and light side ROM 113, and in step S1716 it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written. is written in the sound and light side RAM 114 in this state.

In the subsequent step S1718, the output standby flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for identifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that there is sound output data waiting to be subject to sound output control. In the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area in which the waiting sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the waiting sound output data is set. After that, the read processing is terminated.

<Sound Output Control Processing of Sound and Light MPU 112>
Next, the sound output control process of step S506 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1801, among the sound output areas to be updated among the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 of the sound and light side RAM 114, the upper (the first sound output area 171 is the highest) , and the 16th sound output area 186 is on the lowest side) Each sound output side priority data set in the two sound output areas is read. Here, the sound output area to be updated is the sound output area in which the sound output data is stored and the output start timing is not set, that is, the sound output area is not in a standby state for sound output control. Refers to the sound output area. In the following step S1802, which of the read sound output side priority data has the higher priority is specified, and in step S1803 the sound output area with the higher priority is set as the area for output.

In subsequent step S1804, the sound output side priority data of the sound output area on the next higher side is read for the sound output area to be updated, and in step S1805, the sound output side priority data of the area for output is read. Then, in step S1806, which of the read sound output side priority data has the higher priority is specified, and in step S1807, the sound output area of the higher priority side is set as the area for output. do.

After that, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not the comparison processing of the sound output side priority data has been completed for all the sound output areas to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the processing of steps S1804 to S1807 is repeated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809.

In step S1809, the speaker unit 45 is controlled to output sound based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the sound output data stored in the sound output area set as the output area. In this case, in one sound output control process, only one sound output data is subject to sound output control, and sound output data stored in other sound output areas to be updated are not subject to sound output control. That is, the sound output data is in a mute setting state.

In subsequent step S1810, it is determined whether or not sound output data whose pointer information is the final pointer information exists among the sound output data stored in the sound output area to be updated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not the sound output data, which is the final pointer information, is base data or data at the time of notification occurrence. If it is the base data or the data at the time of notification generation, in step S1812, the pointer information of the sound output data, which is the final pointer information, is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the restoration process, the pointer information of the sound output data to be restored is repeatedly updated.

Note that identification of whether the data is the base data or the data at the time of notification is performed using the sound output side priority data. In other words, the sound output side priority data can be used not only for comparing priorities but also for specifying the type of sound output data.

If a negative determination is made in step S1811, in step S1813, the sound output data that is the final pointer information is cleared, and the sound output area storing the sound output data is stored. side priority data is cleared. That is, the sound output data other than the base data and the data at the time of notification are cleared by becoming the final pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1810, when the process of step S1812 is executed, or when the process of step S1813 is executed, in step S1814, the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 The updating process of the pointer information is executed for each of the areas to be updated. As a result, in the next processing of the sound output control process, sound output control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the sound output data that was the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1812 is not processed, and the sound output data waiting to be updated is also excluded. Excluded from processing.

After that, in step S1815, it is determined whether or not there is sound output data whose output start timing is present in the sound output data waiting to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1815, the real intention output control processing is terminated as it is, and if affirmative determination is made in step S1815, the sound output data corresponding to the output start timing is updated in step S1816. After adding the target sound output data, the real intention output control process is ended.

<Drive Control of Movable Object in Sound and Light MPU 112>
Next, the contents of drive control of the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b executed by the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described.

<Setting processing of movable object effect of sound and light side MPU 112>
First, the setting processing of the movable object effect in step S1210 in the display side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the setting process, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the command currently received from the display side MPU 122 is a command indicating that the curtain board presentation should be started. If it is the command, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, the curtain plate effect flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and the first stage control flag also provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". The curtain plate effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that the curtain plate effect execution control using the curtain plate movable object 52 should be performed. The first stage control flag is set to the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation (see FIG. 6) that exist as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52. This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that it is in a state in which execution control of the one-step operation should be performed.

After that, in step S1903, the type of curtain board presentation is grasped from the content of the command received this time. Specifically, the type of curtain plate effect to be executed this time out of the first stage effect, second stage effect and third stage effect is grasped. Then, according to the grasped result, in the subsequent step S1904, flag setting processing corresponding to the type of curtain board effect is executed. Specifically, the sound and light side RAM 114 is provided with a first stage effect flag, a second stage effect flag, and a third stage effect flag. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the type. After that, the setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1901, it means that the command currently received from the display side MPU 122 is a command indicating that the disc effect should be started, so the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, "1" is set to the disc effect flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114. FIG. The disk effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that it is in a state in which execution control of the disk effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b should be performed.

After that, in step S1906, the types of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b to be executed for the disk effect are grasped from the contents of the command received this time. Specifically, the left side single effect using only the left disk movable object 62a, the right side single effect using only the right disk movable object 62b, and the synchronized effect using both disk movable objects 62a and 62b Among them (see FIG. 7), the type of disc presentation to be executed this time is grasped. Then, according to the grasped result, in the subsequent step S1907, flag setting processing corresponding to the type of disc effect is executed. Specifically, the sound and light side RAM 114 is provided with a left side single effect flag, a right side single effect flag, and a synchronous effect flag. Set the corresponding flag to "1". After that, the setting process is terminated.

<Movable object control process of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the movable object control processing of step S507 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the curtain board effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If the determination is affirmative, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the first stage control flag of sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If the determination is affirmative, the movable object control process is terminated after the first step control process is executed in step S2003.

<First stage control processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first stage control process.

In step S2101, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is confirmed to determine whether or not the drive by the first stage control process has started. If a negative determination is made, the synchronous drive start process is executed in step S2102, and then the first stage control process is terminated. In the synchronous drive start process, the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the drive units 53a and 53b for the curtain plates move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement starts simultaneously. Driving of the plate drive units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the movable panel 52 starts to move in the first stage, and the movable panel 52 starts to descend while maintaining a horizontal state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the panel movable object 52 is on standby. If a negative determination is made, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made, the first step control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, synchronous drive stop processing is executed. In the synchronous drive stop processing, the drive portions 56a and 56b for the curtain plates are stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b are stopped at the same time. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 stops descending while maintaining the horizontal state. In the subsequent step S2106, a waiting time setting process is executed. In the set process, data of the waiting time (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound and light side RAM 114, and measurement of the waiting time is started. During the standby time set here, the movable panel 52 waits at the positions where the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. After that, the first stage control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the first step control processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the first stage effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made, it means that the current curtain plate effect is the first stage effect, so in order to execute the return control process (step S2010) in the next process of the movable object control process, step At S2109, after the first stage control flag is cleared to "0" and the return control flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", this first stage control process is terminated. The return control flag is the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation that exist as the operation modes of the movable panel 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that it is in a state in which execution control should be performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2108, it means that the current curtain board presentation is the second stage presentation or the third stage presentation. In this case, in step S2110, after the first step control flag is cleared to "0" and the second step control flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", the first step control process is started. finish. The second stage control flag is set to the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation that exist as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that the execution control of the two-step operation should be performed.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2002, then in step S2004 it is determined whether or not the second stage control flag of sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". determine whether If the determination is affirmative, the movable object control process is terminated after executing the second stage control process in step S2005.

<Second stage control processing of the sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the second stage control process.

In step S2201, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is checked to determine whether or not it is after the start of driving by the second stage control process. If a negative determination is made, in step S2202, processing for setting the number of times of switching is executed. This setting process is a process for setting the number of times of switching when the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted left and right in the second stage operation. is set to "4" as data of the number of times of switching.

In the subsequent step S2203, a driving time setting process is executed. In the setting process, the driving time is set when the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b to be driven are continuously driven in each tilting operation. Specifically, 4 sec is set as the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b located at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit positions.

In the subsequent step S2204, the descent start process on the side corresponding to the number of times of switching is executed. Specifically, the left side panel driving portion 56a starts to be driven so that the left side slide member 55a descends toward the limit position. However, in this case, the right side curtain plate drive portion 56b is maintained in a stopped state. As a result, only the left side of the movable panel 52 descends, and the movable panel 52 is tilted downward toward the left. After that, the second stage control process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the measurement of the drive time set in the sound and light side RAM 114 has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the second stage control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of switching set in the sound/light side RAM 114 . In subsequent step S2207, it is determined whether or not the number of switching times after the subtraction is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, in step S2208, the corresponding curtain plate drive unit 56a is moved so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the lowering completion side rise toward the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. , 56b. Further, in step S2209, the corresponding curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the side opposite to the side subjected to the processing in step S2208 descend toward the limit position. control the state. Thereafter, in step S2210, after executing the driving time setting process in the same manner as in step S2203, the second stage control process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the second stage control flag is cleared to "0" and the pair waiting control flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1" in step S2211. After that, the second stage control process is terminated. The pair-waiting control flag is the pair-waiting control flag among the first-step operation, the second-step operation, the pair-waiting operation, the third-step operation, and the return operation that exist as the operation modes of the movable panel 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that it is in a state in which operation execution control should be performed.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2004, it is checked in step S2006 whether the pair waiting control flag in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". judge. If an affirmative determination is made, the pair waiting control process is executed in step S2007, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Pair wait control process of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing pair waiting control processing.

In step S2301, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is after the start of driving by the pair waiting control process. When a negative determination is made, in step S2302, after executing return start processing for both curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b, this pair waiting control processing ends. In the return start process, the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the drive units 53a and 53b for the curtain plate move at the same speed toward the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. The driving of the parts 56a and 56b is started. In the second stage control process, both slide members 55a and 55b are located below the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b at the end stage of the second stage control process. , both the slide members 55a and 55b are raised.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not one of the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b that were ON in step S2303 are brought into a stopped state. In this case, if both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON in step S2303, both the curtain plate drive sections 56a and 56b are stopped. When both adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON, the curtain board movable object 52 returns to the horizontal state.

In subsequent step S2305, it is determined whether or not both adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the third stage effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". When an affirmative determination is made, in step S2307, light emission data for the third stage effect is read out, and in step S2308, sound output data for the third stage effect is read out.

By executing the process of step S2307, the light emission data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the light emission data reading process (FIG. 28) already described, and then the light emission control process (FIG. 31) is executed. By doing so, light emission control is performed with a light emission pattern corresponding to the third-step operation in accordance with the timing when the third-step operation is started. In this case, the light emission data has a lower priority than the notification light emission data and the final effect light emission data, but has a higher priority than the other light emission data, and the final effect can be executed. Since the third stage operation is not executed in terms of timing, light emission control is basically executed in accordance with the execution of the third stage operation.

Further, by executing the process of step S2308, the sound output data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the sound output data reading process (FIG. 34) already described, and then the sound output control process ( 35) is executed, sound output control is performed with a sound output pattern corresponding to the third-step operation in accordance with the timing when the third-step operation is started. In this case, the sound output data has a lower priority than the notification sound output data and the sound output data for the confirmation effect, but has a higher priority than the other sound output data. Since the third stage operation is not performed at the timing at which is performed, sound output control is basically performed in accordance with the execution of the third stage operation.

Thereafter, in step S2309, the pair waiting control flag is cleared to "0" and the third stage control flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", after which the pair waiting control process is terminated. The third stage control flag is set to the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation that exist as the operation modes of the movable panel 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 112 that the execution control of the three-step operation should be performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, it means that the current curtain board presentation was the second stage presentation. In this case, in step S2310, the pair waiting control flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0", and after setting the return control flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 to "1", this pair waiting control process is terminated. .

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2006, then in step S2008 it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third stage control flag of the sound and light side RAM 114. determine whether If the determination is affirmative, the movable object control process is terminated after executing the third stage control process in step S2009.

<Third stage control process of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the third stage control process.

In step S2401, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is checked to determine whether or not it is after the start of driving by the third stage control process. If a negative determination is made, synchronous drive start processing is executed in step S2402. In the synchronous drive start process, the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the drive units 53a and 53b for the curtain plates move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement starts simultaneously. Driving of the plate drive units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the panel movable object 52 starts to move toward the limit position, and the panel movable object 52 starts to descend while maintaining a horizontal state. After that, in step S2403, after executing the synchronous driving time setting process, the third stage control process ends. In the setting process, the drive time for continuing the descent of the panel movable object 52 while maintaining the horizontal state is set. Specifically, 4 sec is set as the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b located at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit positions.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the state after the synchronous drive started in step S2402 is stopped by checking the flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 in step S2404. Determine whether or not If a negative determination is made in step S2404, then in step S2405 it is determined whether or not measurement of the synchronous driving time set in the sound and light side RAM 114 has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the third stage control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406.

In step S2406, synchronous drive stop processing is executed. In the synchronous drive stop processing, the drive portions 56a and 56b for the curtain plates are stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b are stopped at the same time. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 stops descending while maintaining the horizontal state. In the subsequent step S2407, a standby time setting process is executed. In the set process, data of the waiting time (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound and light side RAM 114, and measurement of the waiting time is started. During the standby time set here, the movable panel 52 waits at the limit positions of the slide members 55a and 55b. After that, the third stage control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. If the determination in step S2408 is negative, the third stage control process is terminated. 0" is cleared and the return control flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and then the third stage control process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the return control process is executed in step S2010, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Recovery control processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing return control processing.

In step S2501, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is checked to determine whether or not the drive by the return control process has started. If a negative determination is made, this return control process is terminated after executing the synchronous return start process in step S2502. In the synchronous return start process, the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b of the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b are moved toward the initial position at the same speed, and the movement is started simultaneously. Driving of the plate drive units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the panel movable object 52 starts to move toward the initial position, and the panel movable object 52 starts to rise while maintaining a horizontal state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not one of the pair of left and right panel initial position sensors 57a and 57b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the return control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the panel drive units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the panel initial position sensors 57a and 57b that were ON in step S2503 are stopped. In this case, if both the panel initial position sensors 57a and 57b are ON in step S2503, both the panel drive units 56a and 56b are stopped.

In the subsequent step S2505, it is determined whether or not both the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the return control processing is terminated as is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, various flag clear processing is executed in step S2506, and then the return control processing is terminated. . In the various flag clearing process, the restoration control flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0", and the curtain board effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0". Furthermore, among the first stage effect flag, the second stage effect flag and the third stage effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114, the flag corresponding to the type of the curtain board effect of this time is cleared to "0". As a result, the curtain plate presentation for this time ends.

<The scene where the third stage production is performed>
Next, how the third stage effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 43(a) shows the drive state of the left side panel drive section 56a, FIG. 43(b) shows the drive state of the right side panel drive section 56b, and FIG. 43(c) shows the left adjustment position. FIG. 43(d) shows the detection state of the adjustment position sensor 58b on the right side, and FIG. 43(e) shows the effect on the front side of the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. Execution status is shown, and FIG. 43(f) shows the execution status of the effect corresponding to the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. In the following description, the driving state of the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b when the slide members 55a and 55b descend is referred to as the forward driving state, and the curtain plate when the slide members 55a and 55b ascend. The drive state of the drive units 56a and 56b is called a reverse drive state.

By starting the third stage effect at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43(b), drive control is started so that the right side panel drive section 56b is driven in the forward direction. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 starts to descend while maintaining a horizontal state. Also, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 43(e), on the side of light emission control and sound output control, the third stage effect, which is before the third stage operation, is started.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 43(c) and 43(d), the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are turned ON, and as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), At this time, the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are stopped. As a result, the curtain board movable object 52 is stopped from descending in the horizontal state, and this state is maintained until the timing of t3.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 43(b), while maintaining the right side panel drive section 56b in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the left side panel drive section 56a is driven in the forward direction. As a result, the panel movable object 52 is inclined downward toward the left side. After that, at timings t4, t5, and t6, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), the left panel drive unit 56a and the right panel drive unit 56b are driven. Switching control is performed so that one of them is driven in the forward direction and the other is driven in the reverse direction. As a result, the state in which the movable member 52 of the curtain plate is tilted downward toward the left side and the state in which it is tilted downward toward the right side alternately occur. That is, the second step operation is performed.

After that, at the timing of t7, the second stage operation is completed, and the pair waiting control is started subsequently, so that the left side panel driving is performed as shown in FIGS. Both the portion 56a and the right side panel driving portion 56b are driven in opposite directions. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the left adjustment position sensor 58a is turned ON, and as shown in FIG. 43(a), the left curtain plate driving section 56a stops. state. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the right adjustment position sensor 58b is turned ON, and as shown in FIG. 43(b), the right curtain plate driving section 56b stops. state. As a result, the panel movable object 52 becomes horizontal again.

After that, at the timing of t10, the third stage operation is started. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), both the left side panel drive section 56a and the right side panel drive section 56b are in the forward driving state. As a result, the panel movable object 52 descends toward the limit position while maintaining a horizontal state. Also, at the timing when the third stage operation is started in the curtain plate movable object 52, as shown in FIGS. , an effect corresponding to the third stage operation is started. For example, at the timing when the curtain board movable object 52 starts to descend again, the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker unit 45, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 simultaneously emit light corresponding to the same color. will be

After that, at the timing of t11, both the slide members 55a and 55b reach their limit positions, and as shown in FIGS. The curtain plate driving portion 56b is brought to a stopped state. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 is stopped from descending in a horizontal state, and this state is maintained until the timing of t12.

After that, the return operation is started at the timing of t12. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), both the left curtain drive section 56a and the right curtain plate drive section 56b are driven in opposite directions. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 starts to rise while maintaining a horizontal state. At the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 43(f), the effect corresponding to the third stage operation in light emission control and sound output control is terminated.

After that, at the timing of t13, both the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and as shown in FIGS. The driving portion 56a and the right side panel driving portion 56b are stopped. As a result, the return of the curtain plate movable object 52 to the initial position in the horizontal state is completed, and the third stage effect is completed.

When the third stage effect is performed as described above, when the movable curtain plate 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the end of the second stage operation in which the movable curtain plate 52 is alternately inclined, Instead of determining the start timing of the lowering operation by controlling the respective drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate individually by the drive time, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On the condition that the panel movable member 52 is moved horizontally, the movable member 52 is moved downward. As a result, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, it becomes easier to secure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

In addition, in accordance with the start of the lowering operation in the horizontal state of the curtain plate movable object 52, the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding to it, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control corresponding to it. The condition is that the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively, instead of specifying the start timing of the sound output control and light emission control by measuring the elapsed time. Then, the sound output control and light emission control are started. As a result, in a configuration in which sound output control and light emission control are performed in accordance with the lowering operation of the movable panel 52, the start timing of the sound output control and light emission control is synchronized with the start timing of the lowering operation of the panel movable article 52. becomes easier.

Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, after the end of the second stage operation in which the movable panel board 52 is alternately placed in the inclined state, when the movable panel board 52 is raised in the horizontal state, Instead of determining the start timing of the rising operation by controlling the drive parts 56a and 56b for the curtain plates individually by the driving time, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On the condition that the panel movable member 52 is in a horizontal state, the moving member 52 is moved up. As a result, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised, it becomes easier to secure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

Further, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and detection results of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are used to determine whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a horizontal state. By judging whether or not, it is not necessary to return the panel movable member 52 to the initial position when switching to the horizontal descent operation mode after the operation mode of alternately inclining state. This makes it possible to quickly switch the operation mode.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the disc effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S2011, this movable object control process is terminated. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2011, in step S2012, it is determined whether or not the synchronization effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is determined whether it is both the left disk movable object 62a and the right disk movable object 62b. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the single control process is executed in step S2013, and then the movable object control process is terminated. After executing the control process, the movable object control process is terminated. These single control processing and synchronous control processing will be described below.

<Single control processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
First, the single control process of step S2013 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is after the start of driving by single control processing. If a negative determination is made, in step S2602, processing to start sliding toward the limit position is executed. In the slide start process, drive of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side corresponding to the flag set to "1" out of the left single effect flag and the right single effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is started. do. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, which are the objects to be controlled this time, start sliding toward the limit position.

In subsequent step S2603, rotation start processing is executed. In the rotation start processing, driving of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled this time is started. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, which are the objects to be controlled this time, start to rotate in a certain direction. After that, this single control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is checked in step S2604 to confirm that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, which are the objects to be controlled this time, have performed the return operation. Determine whether it is done. Note that the process of setting the flag indicating that the return operation is in progress is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b to be controlled this time are in the process of sliding toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, step control processing is executed in step S2606.

Here, stepping motors are used as the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b. As the stepping motor, the pachinko machine 10 uses a hybrid (HB) two-phase stepping motor employing a 1-2 phase excitation system. The stepping motor is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase type, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase or five-phase stepping motor can be used. Each of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is configured to rotate the corresponding disk movable object 62a and 62b by applying a drive signal of reference pulses (for example, 300 pulses) defined as a plurality of pulses. The rotation positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be identified by the number of times the drive signal is output. In step S2606, a process for newly giving a drive signal to the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, which are the control target side this time, is executed.

In the following step S2607, it is determined whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, which are the objects to be controlled this time, have reached their limit positions. Whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by determining whether or not the elapsed time from the execution of the slide start process in step S2602 is the time corresponding to reaching the limit position. done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration provided with a sensor for detecting that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the sensor. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the limit position has been reached by determining whether or not it has been detected.

If a negative determination is made in step S2607, this single control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, the process proceeds to step S2608. In step S2608, the driving state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled this time is stopped. As a result, the sliding movement of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time is stopped. After that, this single control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2605, step control processing is executed in step S2609 in the same manner as in step S2606. In the subsequent step S2610, it is determined whether or not the stop command flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". As already described, the stop command flag is set to "1" in step S1212 of the display-side command handling process (FIG. 22) when a command corresponding to the command to stop the disc effect is received from the display-side MPU 122. . If a negative determination is made in step S2610, this single control process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, then in step S2611 slide start processing toward the initial position is executed, and then this single control processing ends. In the slide start process, return drive is started for the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b, which are the side to be controlled this time. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, which are to be controlled this time, start sliding toward the initial position.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotating. If it is rotating, in step S2613, step control processing is executed in the same manner as in step S2606, and subsequently in step S2614, the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, which are the side to be controlled this time, are executed. is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2614, then in step S2615, the driving state of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, which are the current controlled objects, is stopped.

In other words, the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b in the disk effect is not immediately stopped even if a stop command is generated from the display side MPU 122, and is not stopped after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, i.e., rotation. It stops after reaching the initial position. As a result, the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b at the end of the disk presentation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can always be the same position, and the disk movable object when the disk presentation is started. The rotational positions of 62a and 62b can always be the same.

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, if a negative determination is made in step S2614, or if the process of step S2615 is executed, then in step S2616, the slide initial position sensor 68a, 68b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2616, this single control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2616, this single control process is terminated after executing slide stop processing in step S2617. do. In the slide stop processing, the driving state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b, which are the control target side this time, is stopped.

<Single-control disk production>
Next, the manner in which the disk effect is performed by single control for the disk movable object 62a on the left will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. It should be noted that the mode is basically the same when the disk effect is performed by single control for the disk movable object 62b on the right side.

FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B) show the state of the disc effect by single control executed when different pattern data tables are referred to, and FIGS. 45(a1) and 45( 45(b1) and 45(b2) show the rotational position of the disk movable object 62a, and FIGS. 45(d1) and 45(d2) show the rotation period of the disk movable object 62a.

First, the case of FIG. 45(A) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 45(a1), by receiving a command from the display side MPU 122 to start the disc presentation at the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 45(b1) and 45(d1), Rotation of the disk movable object 62a is started. Also, in this case, although the explanation by illustration is omitted, the disk movable object 62a starts to slide toward the limit position.

After that, at timings t2, t3, and t4, as shown in FIGS. 45(b1) and 45(c1), the disk movable object 62a rotates once, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a It becomes ON state at the timing of . Since the disk movable object 62a reaches the limit position by the timing of t4, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 45(a1), a command indicating that the disc presentation should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. FIG. In this case, the disk movable object 62a starts to slide toward the initial position, although the explanation by illustration is omitted. On the other hand, at this timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the initial rotation position, so the rotation is continued.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 45(b1) and 45(c1), the disk movable object 62a rotates once, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a turns ON, so that the disk movable object 62a Rotation is stopped. In this case, although explanation by illustration is omitted, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a toward the initial position is completed by timing t6. That is, in the case of FIG. 45(A), the rotation of the disk movable object 62a is stopped after the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a toward the initial position is completed. In the case of FIG. 45(A), as shown in FIG. 45(d1), the disc movable object 62a rotates from timing t1 to timing t6.

Next, the case of FIG. 45(B) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 45(a2), at the timing of t11, by receiving a command indicating to start the disc effect from the display side MPU 122, as shown in FIG. 45(b2) and FIG. 45(d2) Rotation of the disk movable object 62a is started. Also, in this case, although the explanation by illustration is omitted, the disk movable object 62a starts to slide toward the limit position.

After that, at timing t12 and timing t13, as shown in FIGS. 45(b2) and 45(c2), the disk movable object 62a rotates once, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a turns ON at each timing. state. Since the disk movable object 62a reaches the limit position by the timing of t3, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 45(a2), a command indicating that the disc presentation should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. FIG. In this case, the disk movable object 62a starts to slide toward the initial position, although the explanation by illustration is omitted. On the other hand, at this timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the initial rotation position, so the rotation is continued.

After that, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIGS. 45(b2) and 45(c2), the disk movable object 62a rotates once, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a turns ON, so that the disk movable object 62a Rotation is stopped. In this case, although description by illustration is omitted, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a toward the initial position is not completed by the timing of t15. That is, in the case of FIG. 45B, after the rotation of the disk movable object 62a is stopped, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a toward the initial position is completed. In the case of FIG. 45(B), as shown in FIG. 45(d2), the disc movable object 62a rotates from timing t11 to timing t15. This rotation period is shorter than in the case of FIG. 45(A).

As described above, when the disk effect is executed, the rotating motions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped by being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. Thus, when the rotating motion of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, it is possible to always stop them in the state of being arranged at the rotation initial position. It is possible to keep the rotational positions of the animals 62a and 62b constant. Further, it is possible to make the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b constant at the start of rotation of the disk effect.

Similarly, when the disk effect is executed, the sliding motions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b and stopped. As a result, when the sliding motion of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can always be stopped in the slide initial position, and the disk movement can be performed when the disk effect is not executed. It is possible to keep the slide position mode of the animals 62a and 62b constant. Further, it is possible to make the slide positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b constant at the start of rotation of the disk effect.

In the case of the configuration in which the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped on the condition that the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b detect the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as described above, the display-side MPU 122 executes the disk effect when executing the disk effect. It suffices to transmit a command indicating that the disc effect should be started and a command indicating that the disc effect should be stopped according to the data defined in the pattern data table, and the display side MPU 122 and the sound and light side MPU 112 can perform the disc effect. Even if the execution period is not managed, it is possible to make the rotation position and slide position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b constant at the end of the disk presentation. Therefore, at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to facilitate the design of the processing configuration for executing the disc effect. In the design stage, it is possible to vary the rotation period of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b simply by adjusting the transmission timing of the command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped in relation to the rotation cycle of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. It is possible to achieve

<Synchronization control processing of sound and light side MPU 112>
Next, the synchronization control process of step S2014 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2701, a flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is after the start of driving by synchronous control processing. If a negative determination is made, left side slide start processing toward the limit position is executed in step S2702, and right side slide start processing toward the limit position is executed in step S2703. In each of these slide start processes, driving of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start sliding toward the limit position at the same speed, and the sliding movement starts at the same time.

After that, left rotation start processing is executed in step S2704, and right rotation start processing is executed in step S2705. In each of these rotation start processes, driving of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start rotating at the same speed, and the rotations start at the same time. After that, the synchronization control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, it is checked in step S2706 by checking the flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 whether or not the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are performing a return operation. judge. Note that the process of setting the flag indicating that the return operation is in progress is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2715, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not each disk movable object 62a, 62b is in the middle of sliding toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, step S2708 executes left step control processing and left step count update processing. Also, in step S2709, the step control process on the right side is executed, and the number of steps on the right side is updated.

In each step control process, a process for newly applying a drive signal to the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is executed to advance the number of steps of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b. In this case, the data defining the correspondence relationship between the drive signal output pattern in each step control process and the excitation pattern of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is stored in the movable object data group 153 of the sound and light side ROM 113. is predetermined in The data defining this correspondence relationship includes the data of the acceleration period required to bring the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b into a constant speed rotation state, and the data of the constant speed period after the acceleration period. ing. The data of the acceleration period includes data of the correspondence relationship between the drive signal output pattern and the excitation pattern for the entire acceleration period. On the other hand, the data of the constant speed period includes only the data of the correspondence between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern for a part of the constant speed period. It will be used repeatedly. However, the data of the constant speed period may also include data of the corresponding relationship between the drive signal output pattern and the excitation pattern for the entire constant speed period. In this configuration, it is preferable that the data of the constant speed period exist for a period equal to or longer than the maximum time that can be assumed as the disc effect.

Here, in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114, a left step number area for managing the number of steps of the left disk rotation driving section 67a and the step number of the right disk rotation driving section 67b are stored. A right step count area is provided for management. As already explained, each of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is configured to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of a reference pulse defined as a plurality of pulses. It has a step-by-step configuration. The numerical value information in each step number area is incremented by 1 each time a drive signal is applied to the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, and is cleared to "0" when the numerical value information corresponds to the reference pulse. It has become. By confirming the numerical value information of each step number area, the sound and light side MPU 112 can grasp the rotational positions of the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b. In addition, when the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the numerical information in the corresponding step number areas may be cleared to "0".

In subsequent step S2710, it is determined whether or not both disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached their limit positions. To determine whether or not the limit position has been reached, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the execution of the slide start processing in steps S2702 and S2703 is the time corresponding to reaching the limit position. It is done by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration provided with a sensor for detecting that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the sensor. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it reached|attained at the limit position by determining whether it detected.

If a negative determination is made in step S2710, this synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S2710, this synchronization control process is terminated after executing the processes of steps S2711 and S2712. . In step S2711, the driving state of the left disk slide driving portion 66a is stopped, and in step S2712, the driving state of the right disk sliding driving portion 66b is stopped. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b stop sliding.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, in step S2713, the left step control process is executed and the left step count update process is executed in the same manner as in step S2708. In step S2714, as in step S2709, the step control process on the right side is executed, and the number of steps on the right side is updated.

In the subsequent step S2715, it is determined whether or not the stop command flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". As already described, the stop command flag is set to "1" in step S1212 of the display-side command handling process (FIG. 22) when a command corresponding to the command to stop the disc effect is received from the display-side MPU 122. . If a negative determination is made in step S2715, this synchronous control process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2715, left side slide start processing toward the initial position is executed in step S2716, and right side slide start processing toward the initial position is executed in step S2717. . In these slide start processes, the corresponding disk slide drive portions 66a and 66b are started to drive for return. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start sliding toward the initial position at the same speed, and the sliding movement starts at the same time. After that, in step S2718, after executing adjustment processing for rotation stop, this synchronization control processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, this synchronous control process is terminated after the return process is executed in step S2719.

The adjustment processing for rotation stop in step S2718 and the return processing in step S2719 will be described below.

<Adjustment process for stopping rotation of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing adjustment processing for stopping rotation in step S2718 in the synchronization control processing (FIG. 46).

First, in step S2801, by confirming the left step number area and the right step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114, either one of the pair of left and right disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b can perform step Determines if the number is within the bounds. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the adjustment process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, the stop restriction flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". After setting the number of steps for stop cancellation determination, this adjustment process ends.

Here, the limited range means that even when a command corresponding to a command to stop the disk effect is received from the display-side MPU 122, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate for at least the number of steps for stop cancellation determination. is a reference range for determining whether or not to execute a process that does not stop the rotation even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. It is set as the number of steps including the number of steps corresponding to the detection range of 69b. Specifically, the limited range is set to include the entire range of the number of steps corresponding to the detection range and to be wider than the range of the number of steps in both the forward direction and the reverse direction. there is More specifically, the limit range is preferably ±20%, more preferably ±10%, and ±5% of the maximum number of steps with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position. is particularly preferred. In the pachinko machine 10, the limit range is set to ±5% (±15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position.

The number of steps for stop cancellation determination is the number of steps for ensuring that the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are distant from the initial rotation positions, and is equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the detection range. defined as a number. More specifically, the number of steps is set to be equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the limited range. ing. As will be described later, when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate by the number of steps for stop cancellation determination, the stop limit flag is cleared to "0" and the monitoring of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is resumed. .

<Processing for recovery of sound and light side MPU 112>
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the recovery process in step S2719 in the synchronization control process (FIG. 46).

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the left slide initial position sensor 68a is ON. to stop This stops the left disk movable object 62a from sliding toward the initial position.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2902 is executed, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the right slide initial position sensor 68b is ON. If it is ON, in step S2904, the driving state of the right disk slide driving section 66b is stopped. As a result, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62b on the right side toward the initial position is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not at least one of the disk movable objects 62a, 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the return processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2906, as in the case of step S2708, the left step control process is executed, and the left step count update process is executed. In step S2907, as in step S2709, the step control process on the right side is executed, and the number of steps on the right side is updated.

In the subsequent step S2908, it is determined whether or not the stop restriction flag of the sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, in step S2909, by checking the left step number area and the right step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114, the pair of left and right disk movable objects are checked. By grasping the current number of steps of 62a and 62b and confirming the area for stop cancellation determination in the movable object data area 164, the number of steps for stop cancellation judgment is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the current number of steps of both the disk movable objects 62a and 62b has reached the number of steps for the stop cancellation determination. If the determination in step S2909 is negative, the return processing is terminated, and if the determination in step S2909 is positive, the stop limit flag is cleared to "0" in step S2910, and then the return processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if the stop restriction flag is not set to "1", rotation stop processing is executed in step S2911, and then this return processing ends.

In the rotation stop processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the left initial position counter provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" in step S3002. The left initial position counter is a counter for counting the number of times it is confirmed that the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, 1 is added to the numerical information of the left initial position counter in step S3003, and in subsequent step S3004 the numerical information of the left initial position counter becomes 2 or more. determine whether or not If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, then in step S3005 the driving state of the left disk rotation driving portion 67a is stopped. As a result, the rotation of the disk movable object 62a on the left side is stopped.

If the process of step S3002 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, then in step S3006 it is determined whether the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is ON. determine whether If a negative determination is made in step S3006, in step S3007, after clearing the right initial position counter provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114 to "0", this rotation stop processing is executed. finish. The right initial position counter is a counter for counting the number of times it is confirmed that the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, 1 is added to the numerical information of the right initial position counter in step S3008, and in subsequent step S3009 the numerical information of the right initial position counter becomes 2 or more. determine whether or not If a negative determination is made in step S3009, the rotation stopping process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, then in step S3010 the drive state of the right disk rotation drive unit 67b is stopped, and then this rotation stop processing is terminated. As a result, the rotation of the disk movable object 62b on the right side is stopped.

<Effects of Execution of Adjustment Processing for Stopping Rotation>
Next, a description will be given of the effect of executing the adjustment process for stopping the rotation (FIG. 47) and the process associated therewith as described above.

First, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 50, problems in the case where the adjustment process for rotation stop and the process associated therewith are not executed will be described.

FIG. 50(a) shows the state of reception of commands from the display side MPU 122, FIG. 50(b) shows the rotational position of the left disk movable object 62a, and FIG. 50(d) shows the rotation period of the disk movable object 62a on the left side, FIG. 50(e) shows the rotational position of the disk movable object 62b on the right side, and FIG. 50(f) shows the rotation of the right side. Fig. 50(g) shows the rotation period of the disk movable object 62b on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), at the timing of t1, by receiving a command from the display-side MPU 122 indicating that the disc presentation by synchronous control should be started, As shown in FIG. 50(e) and FIG. 50(g), the left disk movable object 62a starts to rotate, and the right disk movable object 62b starts to rotate as shown in FIGS. Also, in this case, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start to slide toward the limit position, although the explanation by illustration is omitted.

After that, at timings t2, t3, and t4, as shown in FIGS. 50(b) and 50(c), the disk movable object 62a on the left side rotates once and reaches the initial rotation position on the left side. As shown in FIGS. 50(e) and 50(f), the sensor 69a is turned on at each timing, the disk movable object 62a on the right side rotates once, and the initial rotation position sensor 69b on the right side rotates. It becomes an ON state at the timing. Since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position by the timing t4, the sliding movement of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

After that, at timing t5 immediately after timing t4, as shown in FIG. 50(a), a command indicating that the disc presentation should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. FIG. In this case, the timing t5 is the timing when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have passed through the initial rotation positions.

Here, from the viewpoint of reducing the monitoring processing load, the monitoring of the detection results from the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b in the sound and light side MPU 112 receives a command from the display side MPU 122 indicating that the disc presentation should be stopped. will be started later. Also, in the sound and light side MPU 112, after monitoring the detection result from the left rotation initial position sensor 69a, the detection result from the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is monitored. Then, as shown in FIGS. 50(b) and 50(e), depending on the timing of receiving the stop command from the display-side MPU 122, the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is immediately stopped. A situation may occur in which the rotation of the disk movable object 62b on the right side is stopped after one round. In this case, despite the disc performance by the synchronous control process, there is a possibility that the rotation periods of the left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b are unintentionally different from the design of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, as shown in FIGS. 50(d) and 50(g), the disk movable object 62a on the left rotates from timing t1 to timing t5, while the disk movable object 62b on the right rotates. The rotation is from the timing t1 to the timing t6, which is longer than , and the stop timings are not synchronized.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51, the disc presentation by the synchronous control process when the adjustment process for rotation stop and the accompanying process are executed will be described.

FIG. 51(a) shows the state of reception of commands from the display side MPU 122, FIG. 51(b) shows the rotational position of the left disk movable object 62a, and FIG. Fig. 51(d) shows the left limit range, Fig. 51(e) shows the rotational position of the right disk movable object 62b, and Fig. 51(f) shows the initial rotation position sensor 69b on the right FIG. 51(g) shows the right limit range, and FIG. 51(h) shows the state of the stop limit flag.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), at the timing of t1, the display-side MPU 122 receives a command from the display side MPU 122 indicating that the disk performance by synchronous control should be started. As the movable object 62a starts to rotate, the disk movable object 62b on the right side starts to rotate as shown in FIG. 51(e). Also, in this case, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start to slide toward the limit position, although the explanation by illustration is omitted.

After that, at timing t2, timing t3, and timing t4, as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 51(e) and 51(f), the right disk movable object 62b rotates once, and the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is set to the ON state at each timing. It becomes an ON state at the timing. Since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b reach the limit position by the timing t3, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped from sliding.

In this case, at timing t4, which is timing immediately before timing t5, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 51(c) and 51(f), the timing of t4 is not the timing when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have passed through the initial rotation positions, but the timing shown in FIG. As shown in d) and FIG. 51(g), it corresponds to the restricted range of each disk movable object 62a, 62b.

Here, the limited range and the contents of the operation when the stop instruction command is received in the limited range will be described again with reference to FIG. 52 . FIGS. 52(a1) and 52(a2) are schematic diagrams showing the left disk movable object 62a, and FIGS. 52(b1) and 52(b2) are schematic diagrams showing the right disk movable object 62b.

As shown in FIGS. 52(a1) and 52(b1), the limited range Y includes all the number of steps corresponding to the detection range X of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, and is more positive than the range of the number of steps. The range is set to be wide by a predetermined number of steps with respect to both the side and the reverse direction. Specifically, the limited range Y is set to ±5% (±15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position.

When a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display side MPU 122 in a situation where one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is present at the rotational position of the number of steps included in the limit range, the step for stop release determination is performed. Monitoring of detection results from the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is not executed for several minutes or longer. That is, until the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate for at least the number of steps for stop cancellation determination, the rotation is not stopped even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. The number of steps for stop cancellation determination is determined as a number of steps greater than or equal to the number of steps included in the limit range. defined in the steps. Therefore, when a command corresponding to a stop command is received from the display-side MPU 122 in a situation where one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is present at the rotational position of the number of steps included in the limit range, the command corresponding to the stop command shown in FIG. ) and FIG. 52(b2), stop control of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is restricted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, when a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display side MPU 122 at timing t4, which is the timing included in the left and right limit ranges, as shown in FIG. , the stop limit flag is set to "1" at the timing of t4. Since the state in which the stop restriction flag is set is maintained until timing t6, at timing t5, as shown in FIGS. Even if 69b is ON, each disk movable object 62a, 62b is not stopped.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 51(b) and 51(e), the left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b advance in the rotation direction by the number of steps for stop cancellation determination, thereby stopping restriction. The flag is cleared to "0". Then, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 51(c) and 51(f), the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are turned ON, so that FIGS. 51(b) and 51(e) As shown, each disk moveable 62a, 62b is stopped simultaneously.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the rotating motion of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped rotating, non-rotating, and starting rotation. It becomes possible to unify the mode. In addition, the control mode when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are operated includes start control, stop command flag setting control, and stop control when the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b detect the stop command flag after setting the stop command flag. Therefore, the processing can be simplified when diversifying the operation periods of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing at which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, it is possible to adjust the number of revolutions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. is. In other words, it is possible to diversify the number of revolutions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b while making it possible to stop the rotation after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b simply by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag. Become.

By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing at which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the rotation stop timing of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is changed to the slide stop timing. can be moved back and forth with respect to That is, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b simply by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag.

When the stop command flag is set to "1" while the number of steps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is within the limited range, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. Even if it is done, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not stopped. As a result, if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b cannot be stopped synchronously once the stop control of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is executed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be stopped. It becomes possible to avoid the stop of 62b, and it becomes easy to stop each disc movable object 62a, 62b in a synchronized state.

In a configuration in which the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b for driving the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stepping motors, the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are grasped using the number of steps of the stepping motors. This simplifies the processing configuration for grasping the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

When the stop command flag is set while the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b, or immediately after the stop command flag is set, the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b detect that the disk can be moved. When an animal 62a, 62b is detected and an attempt is made to stop each disk movable object 62a, 62b, an event occurs in which only one disk movable object 62a stops and the other disk movable object 62b continues to rotate. can occur. On the other hand, if the stop command flag is set in such a situation, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are restricted from stopping. becomes easier.

Even if the stop of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is restricted, it will be within the range of one round. It is possible to obtain excellent effects as already described.

Stopping of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is restricted by not executing the monitoring process of the rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b. In this case, the restriction is lifted when the number of steps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b reaches the number of steps for stop cancellation determination. This simplifies the processing configuration for ascertaining the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b and the processing configuration for releasing the stop restriction of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

When the third stage effect is performed as the curtain plate effect, when the movable curtain plate 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the second step operation in which the movable curtain plate 52 is alternately inclined, Instead of determining the start timing of the lowering operation by controlling the respective drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate individually by the drive time, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On the condition that the panel movable member 52 is moved horizontally, the movable member 52 is moved downward. As a result, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, it becomes easier to secure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

In addition, in accordance with the start of the lowering operation in the horizontal state of the curtain plate movable object 52, the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding to it, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control corresponding to it. The condition is that the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively, instead of specifying the start timing of the sound output control and light emission control by measuring the elapsed time. Then, the sound output control and light emission control are started. As a result, in a configuration in which sound output control and light emission control are performed in accordance with the lowering operation of the movable panel 52, the start timing of the sound output control and light emission control is synchronized with the start timing of the lowering operation of the panel movable article 52. becomes easier.

Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, after the end of the second stage operation in which the movable panel board 52 is alternately placed in the inclined state, when the movable panel board 52 is raised in the horizontal state, Instead of determining the start timing of the rising operation by controlling the drive parts 56a and 56b for the curtain plates individually by the driving time, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On the condition that the panel movable member 52 is in a horizontal state, the moving member 52 is moved up. As a result, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised, it becomes easier to secure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

Further, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and detection results of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are used to determine whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a horizontal state. By judging whether or not, it is not necessary to return the panel movable member 52 to the initial position when switching to the horizontal descent operation mode after the operation mode of alternately inclining state. This makes it possible to quickly switch the operation mode.

The sound and light side MPU 112 controls the execution of effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 based on the command sent by the display side MPU 122, and the display side MPU 122 displays the pattern based on the command sent by the sound and light side MPU 112. It controls execution of effects on the display device 31 . As a result, when each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the pattern display device 31 executes an effect during the same period, it is difficult for the effect to be out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

In particular, even though the sound and light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of communication with respect to the display side MPU 122 when the main side MPU 92 is used as a reference, the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits a command from the display side MPU 122. Since it is a configuration in which the effect is executed after daring to wait, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in each effect in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the pattern display device 31. becomes.

In the configuration in which when the effect operating device 48 is operated, the effect corresponding to the operation is executed by each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the pattern display device 31, the display side MPU 122 After transmitting the operation generation command, the pattern display device 31 performs an effect corresponding to the operation, and not only that, the sound and light side MPU 112 emits various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 after the display side MPU 122 transmits the operation effect command. And the speaker section 45 performs an effect corresponding to the operation. In such a configuration in which a signal indicating whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated is input to the sound and light side MPU 112, the sound and light side MPU 112 waits until the display side MPU 122 transmits an operation effect command before responding to the operation. Since the configuration is such that the effects are executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviations in the effects corresponding to the operations.

It should be noted that the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 have a lower processing load than the display control of the pattern display device 31 . In this case, the signal of the effect operation device 48 is input to the sound and light side MPU 112 . As a result, the display-side MPU 122 having a relatively high processing load does not need to monitor the effect operation device 48, and the processing load of the display-side MPU 122 is reduced.

Since the sound and light side MPU 112 only needs to start monitoring whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated when the display side MPU 122 transmits the operation valid start command, the sound and light side MPU 112 independently determines the start timing of the monitoring. no longer need to specify. As a result, the processing load of the sound/light side MPU 112 can be reduced in a configuration that makes it difficult for the performance corresponding to the operation to deviate. In addition, the display-side MPU 122 is responsible for determining the start timing of various types of processing in the sound-light-side MPU 112, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Not only the sound and light side MPU 112 but also the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is during the valid period. This reduces the possibility that an effect corresponding to the operation will be executed even though the effect operation device 48 is not operated during the effective period.

When receiving the operation enable command from the display side MPU 122 , the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122 . When the display-side MPU 122 receives the execution permission command, the operation presentation is started. As a result, the display-side MPU 122 can start the operation presentation after confirming that the sound/light-side MPU 112 has normally received the operation enable command.

Since the sound and light side MPU 112 may control the performance of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 according to the performance execution timing determined by the display side MPU 122, the sound and light side MPU 112 independently determines the performance execution timing. no longer need to specify As a result, in a configuration that makes it difficult to cause deviations in each effect, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where each of the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 can independently specify the execution timing of the effect. be done.

The sound and light side MPU 112 not only follows the performance execution timing determined by the display side MPU 122, but also the content of the presentation to be executed may follow the content determined by the display side MPU 122. The processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration that determines the content.

In the configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 112 specifies the performance execution timing in accordance with the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the display side MPU 122 does not transmit a command each time the control execution timing comes, but performs predetermined control. Since the command is transmitted when the execution timing comes, it is possible to reduce the frequency of command transmission in the display-side MPU 122 . This reduces the processing load on the display-side MPU 122 .

The display side MPU 122 reads the table data corresponding to the whole effect executed in the game times and the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not read the table data corresponding to the whole, but according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 at each timing during the game round or opening / closing execution mode, during the period Part of the control data of the effect to be executed is read. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read the control data compared to a configuration in which each of the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 reads the control data corresponding to the entirety.

In particular, the display side MPU 122, which controls the display of the symbol display device 31, reads the table data corresponding to the game rounds and the entire presentation executed in the opening/closing execution mode, so even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, the table data is read out. , it becomes possible to continue updating the display on the pattern display device 31 . Since the effect on the symbol display device 31 is likely to attract the player's attention, by continuing to update the display on the symbol display device 31, the influence of communication failure is reduced.

A series of performances in game rounds and opening/closing execution modes can include a plurality of performance ranges with different performance modes, and the part of the control data is set corresponding to the plurality of performance ranges. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control data from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to moderately reduce the frequency of reading the control data in the sound and light side MPU 112 .

In the display side MPU 122, by referring to the data table at each control execution timing, it is possible to perform execution control of a series of effects of game rounds and opening and closing execution modes, and the transmission timing of commands to the sound and light side MPU 112 is also possible. can be specified. Therefore, the information to be referred to by the display-side MPU 122 is collected, thereby reducing the processing load.

In a configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of communication from the display side MPU 122 with respect to the main side MPU 92, and the execution contents of these effects are determined by the sound and light side MPU 112 at the start of the game round and the opening and closing execution mode, Since the display-side MPU 122 reads out the data table corresponding to all the effects executed in the game times and the open/close execution mode, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

In the configuration for specifying the start trigger of the game round or the opening/closing execution mode effect in the sound and light side MPU 112, the sound and light side MPU 112 dares to wait for the display side MPU 122 to transmit a command, and then the effect corresponding to these series of effects is performed. Since it is configured so that it is started by the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the presentation.

At the start of a game cycle or a series of performances in the opening/closing execution mode, the system waits until a command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, and when an abnormality occurs, waits until a command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122.例文帳に追加Instead, the sound and light side MPU 112 independently starts notification. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 will notify. can be started.

In a configuration in which the display-side MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game round, the sound and light-side MPU 112 receives information on the game result (information on whether or not the result is a big win, result type information) is stored. As a result, in the structure in which the sound and light side MPU 112 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122, it is possible to take into account the game result when performing the effect execution control.

Since the display-side MPU 122 can transmit commands to the sound and light-side MPU 112 without considering the game result information, the configuration for transmitting the commands can be optimized. Further, the sound and light side MPU 112 stores and holds the information of the game result, and determines whether or not the content of the effect executed in response to the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 corresponds to the game result. In order to control the execution of effects, when the configuration for transmitting commands to the display side MPU 122 is optimized as described above, the sound and light side MPU 112 can control the execution of effects corresponding to the game results. It becomes possible.

When the symbol display device 31 carries out a fixed effect, the sound and light side MPU 112 executes the effect corresponding to the content of the fixed effect regardless of whether or not the content of the fixed effect corresponds to the game result. control is performed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to matching of the contents of the effects among the various light emitting part groups 71 to 73, the speaker part 45 and the pattern display device 31, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause deviations in the effects.

The sound and light side MPU 112 can read out control data corresponding to effects at different start timings during a game round from one command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of command transmission in the display-side MPU 122 .

The sound and light side MPU 112 can derive a plurality of light emission data for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in a predetermined period by applying different start position numbers and durations to the palette data. is. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the sound and light side ROM 113 stores different light emission data for each type of effect executed in the light emission section groups 71 to 73 at the stage of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, the necessary storage in the sound and light side ROM 113 It is possible to reduce the capacity.

Since the light emission data is derived by applying at least the start position number and the duration time to the palette data, it is possible to diversify the light emission data derived from one palette data. In this case, the data selection table 151g that defines the correspondence between the palette data to be used and the type of start position number and the type of duration applied to the palette data is stored in advance in the ROM 113 on the sound and light side. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for identifying the correspondence between the palette data and the parameter data to be applied thereto.

A plurality of pallet data are stored, and a plurality of start position numbers are also stored. This makes it possible to realize diversification of light emission data while suppressing the required storage capacity of the sound and light side ROM 113 . In this case, start position data that defines the correspondence relationship between pallet data and start position numbers is stored in advance. This simplifies the processing for identifying the correspondence between the palette data and the start position number.

In the palette data, the contents of the switching destination luminescent colors when the luminescent colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched are defined, and the start position number applied to the palette data is defined in the palette data. This is a parameter that indicates which of the plurality of switching destination emission colors is to be used to start light emission control of the LEDs 71a to 73a. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one palette data by a simple technique of differentiating the start position number. Diversification can be achieved while facilitating design.

In the palette data, the contents of the luminescent colors to be switched when the luminescent colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched are defined, and the duration applied to the palette data is determined by the switching defined in the palette data. This is a parameter that indicates the duration time when the luminescence color after the change is to be continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one palette data by a simple method of varying the duration time, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the sound and light side ROM 113 while diversifying the light emission data. It is possible to achieve this while facilitating the design.

The light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, and while using the same palette data for the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, the start position number and continuation number applied to some of these LEDs 71a to 73a are set. By making the times different, it becomes possible to derive different light emission data for the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a while using the same palette data. As a result, the same pallet data can be used even when different effects are executed among the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, so it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

There are cases where the same palette data is used for one group of light emitting units 71 to 73, and cases where different palette data are used. This makes it possible to switch between a simple lighting effect mode and a complicated lighting effect mode simply by changing the number of palette data applied to the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 .

When applying different palette data to one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, list data and group data indicating the type of palette data corresponding to each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit group 71 to 73 are used. It is a configuration that is This simplifies the processing for applying the palette data corresponding to each of the LEDs 71a to 73a.

The light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c, and light emission data can be stored in each of these areas 162a to 162c. As a result, in a situation where one light emission data is used to control the light emission of the light emission unit groups 71 to 73, it is necessary to use other light emission data to control the light emission of the light emission unit groups 71 to 73. Even in this case, the other light emission data can be stored separately from the one light emission data. As a result, it is possible to generate various light emission patterns in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 according to the situation. Furthermore, when switching from one light emission pattern to the next light emission pattern, it is possible to leave the light emission data corresponding to the former light emission pattern. planned.

When the use of the previously used lighting data is stopped and the use of other lighting data is started, the use of the other lighting data ends and the previously used lighting data is used. In the case of recovery, at the recovery timing, the light emitting section groups 71 to 73 emit light in the same manner as when the previously used light emission data is continuously used. As a result, even if the interrupt use of other light emission data occurs, it is possible to cause the light emission unit groups 71 to 73 to perform the light emission mode according to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the light emission modes of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are associated with the display contents of the pattern display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the display contents of the pattern display device 31.

The priority of the light emission data to be used by the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is determined. When a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time and one light emission data is used, the priority is high. This is a configuration for using light emission data. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time, light emission data with a high priority is used, so that light emission operations occurring in the light emission unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the light emission data to be used by comparing the priorities. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for selecting the light emission data to be used.

The light emission data area 162 of the sound and light side RAM 114 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c, and priority of light emission data is set for each area. This eliminates the need to compare the priority of each light emission data when selecting the light emission data to be used. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for selecting the light emission data to be used.

The interrupt area 162b is configured such that an instruction to store new light emission data can occur in a situation where light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b. , the light emitting side priority for storing in the interrupt area 162b is determined, and in a situation where the light emitting data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, when an instruction to store new light emitting data is issued, If the stored light emission data has a higher priority on the light emission side than the new light emission data, the state in which the already stored light emission data is stored without executing the processing for storing the new light emission data. If the new light emission data has a higher priority on the light emission side than the light emission data already stored, the new light emission data is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b.

With such a configuration, in a situation where one light emission data is used to control the light emission of the light emission unit groups 71 to 73, other light emission data is used to control the light emission of the light emission unit groups 71 to 73. If necessary, the light emission control can be switched to that using the other light emission data. As a result, it becomes possible to cause the one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 to perform various operations according to the situation. In addition, in a configuration in which new light emission data can be overwritten even in a situation where light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, a state in which light emission data with a high light emission side priority is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting operation of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the light emission data to be stored in the interrupt area 162b, it is only necessary to compare the light emission side priority, so that the processing for storing the light emission data in the interrupt area 162b can be simplified. .

The sound output data area 163 is provided with a first sound output area 171 to a sixteenth sound output area 186, and each of these areas 171 to 186 can store sound output data. As a result, when sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed using one sound output data, it becomes necessary to perform sound output control of the speaker unit 45 using other sound output data. Even if there is, the other sound output data can be stored separately from the one sound output data. As a result, the speaker unit 45 can output various sounds according to the situation. Furthermore, when switching from one sound output pattern to the next sound output pattern, it is possible to leave the sound output data corresponding to the former sound output pattern. The processing load can be reduced.

If you stop using the previously used sound output data and start using other sound output data, the use of the other sound output data will end and the previously used sound output data will be replaced. When returning to the state of use, at the return timing, the speaker unit 45 outputs the same sound as when the previously used sound output data is continuously used. As a result, even if another sound output data is interrupted, it is possible to cause the speaker unit 45 to perform a sound output mode according to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the sound output mode of the speaker unit 45 is associated with the display content of the pattern display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence relationship with the display content of the pattern display device 31. FIG.

In the sound output data, the priority of the sound output side when the speaker unit 45 is to be used is defined. In this configuration, sound output data with a high output-side priority is used. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of sound output data are stored at the same time, the sound output data having a higher priority on the sound output side is used, so that the sound output operation occurring in the speaker unit 45 can be made appropriate. becomes. Further, even when a plurality of sound output data are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the sound output data to be used by comparing the sound output side priority. Therefore, the processing for selecting sound output data to be used can be simplified.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration for synchronizing the rotation stop timings of the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b in the disk performance by the synchronization control process. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing sensor monitoring processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 112. FIG. It should be noted that the sensor monitoring process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound and light side MPU 112, regardless of whether or not the display side MPU 122 has issued a disc effect stop command. In addition, since the sensor monitoring process is executed once each time the timer interrupt process is activated, it must be executed at least once while the synchronous control process, which will be described later, is executed once. becomes.

In the sensor monitoring process, first, in step S3101, the history shift process on the left side is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114 includes a left current area 164a and a left current area 164a as areas for storing the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. , a previous area 164b on the left and a pre-previous area 164c on the left. The current area 164a on the left side stores the latest detection result of the initial rotation position sensor 69a on the left side. The previous area 164b on the left side stores the detection result of the initial rotation position sensor 69a on the left side one processing time before the detection result stored in the current area 164a on the left side. The two-previous area 164c on the left side stores the detection result of the initial rotation position sensor 69a on the left side two processing times before the detection result stored in the current area 164a on the left side. In step S3101, after clearing the area 164c on the left side before the previous area 164c, the data stored in the previous area 164b on the left side is shifted to the area 164c before the previous area on the left side, and the data stored in the current area 164a on the left side is shifted to the area 164c on the left side. Shift to the previous area 164b, and clear the current area 164a on the left side. Thereafter, in step S3102, the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is stored in the left current area 164a. In each of the areas 164a to 164c, one of the binary data "1" is stored when the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is ON, and when the detection result is OFF. The other "0" is stored.

In the subsequent step S3103, the history shift process on the right side is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114 includes a right current area 164d as an area for storing the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b. , a right-side previous area 164e and a right-side two-previous area 164f are provided. The current area 164d on the right side stores the latest detection result of the initial rotation position sensor 69b on the right side. The previous area 164e on the right side stores the detection result of the initial rotation position sensor 69b on the right side one processing time before the detection result stored in the current area 164d on the right side. The area 164f on the right side before the last time stores the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b that is two processing times before the detection result stored in the current area 164d on the right side. In step S3103, after clearing the two-previous area 164f on the right side, the data stored in the previous area 164e on the right side is shifted to the area 164f on the right side two-last time, and the data stored in the current area 164d on the right side is shifted to the area 164f on the right side. Shift to the previous area 164e, and clear the current area 164d on the right side. Thereafter, in step S3104, after storing the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b in the right current area 164d, the sensor monitoring process is terminated. In each of the areas 164d to 164f, one of binary data "1" is stored when the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is ON, and when the detection result is OFF. The other "0" is stored.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing synchronization control processing in this embodiment, which is executed in the sound and light side MPU 112 .

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not it is after the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have started rotating and before the return operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the stop command flag of sound and light side RAM 114 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3202, this synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, as in step S2716 in the first embodiment, left side slide start processing toward the initial position is executed. Execute the right slide start process toward the position. After that, in step S3205, left history calculation processing is executed, and in step S3206, right history calculation processing is executed.

In the history calculation process on the left side, data is read out from each of the left current area 164a, the left previous area 164b, and the left two-previous area 164c in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114, and the contents of these data are used to determine the rotation initial position. Arithmetic processing necessary for determining whether or not the content corresponds to is executed. Specifically, the data read from the area 164c two times before is inverted (“0”→“1”, “1”→“0”), and the inverted data, the data from the current area 164a, and the previous area 164b and the data from 164b.

In addition, in the history calculation process on the right side, data is read from each of the current area 164d on the right side, the previous area 164e on the right side, and the area 164f on the right side before the last time in the movable object data area 164 of the sound and light side RAM 114, and the contents of these data are rotated. Arithmetic processing necessary to determine whether or not the content corresponds to the initial position is executed. Specifically, the data read from the area 164f two times before is inverted (“0”→“1”, “1”→“0”), and the inverted data, the data from the current area 164d, and the previous area 164e and the data from 164e.

In subsequent step S3207, it is determined whether or not the history calculation results in both steps S3205 and S3206 correspond to the stop result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not both history calculation results are "1". That is, in both the left and right history areas, it is determined whether or not there is a history state in which the previous area is "0" and both the previous area and the current area are "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3207, this synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, this synchronization control process is terminated after executing rotation stop processing in step S3208. . In the rotation stop processing, the drive state of both the left disk rotation drive unit 67a and the right disk rotation drive unit 67b is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not recovery operation is being performed. If the return operation is in progress, in steps S3210 to S3213, processing for stopping the sliding movement of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b at the initial sliding position is executed. The processing contents of these steps S3210 to S3213 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2901 to S2904 in the first embodiment.

In subsequent step S3214, it is determined whether or not at least one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S3214, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3214, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3215, the left side history calculation process is executed in the same manner as in step S3205, and in subsequent step S3206 it is determined whether or not the history calculation result corresponds to the stop result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3216, the drive state of the left disk rotation drive unit 67a is stopped by executing left rotation stop processing in step S3217.

If a negative determination is made in step S3216, or if the process of step S3217 is executed, then in step S3218 the history calculation process on the right side is executed in the same manner as in step S3206 above, and in subsequent step S3219 the history calculation process is executed. Determine if the result corresponds to the stop result. If a negative determination is made in step S3219, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is. After stopping the driving state of the disk rotation drive unit 67b, the synchronization control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3209, other processing is executed in step S3221, and then this synchronization control processing ends. In the other processing, steps S2701 to S2712 of the synchronization control processing (FIG. 46) in the first embodiment are executed. However, in the synchronization control process of the present embodiment, the stop timing is not adjusted by monitoring the number of steps, so the number of steps is not updated in the processes corresponding to steps S2708 and S2709.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, unlike the first embodiment, the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are stored as a history. is placed at the initial rotation position, even if a disc effect stop command is generated, by checking the history, it can be accurately determined that each disc movable object 62a, 62b is placed at the initial rotation position. It is possible to comprehend. Therefore, both disk movable objects 62a and 62b do not need to adopt the configuration for rotating each disk movable object 62a and 62b extra one round or the configuration for monitoring the number of steps as in the first embodiment. can be stopped at the initial rotation position in a synchronized state.

Further, when both the left and right history areas have data contents corresponding to the stop result, the rotation of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is stopped. It is possible to stop at the initial position.

Further, when specifying the stop timing of each disk movable object 62a, 62b, the left and right history areas are always referred to, and the same history calculation processing is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to share a processing configuration for specifying the stop timing, and simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Note that the sensor monitoring process may be configured to be executed twice or more for one execution of the synchronous control process. In this case, it is possible to monitor the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b in more detail.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the third step operation is started in the curtain plate effect by the third step effect, not only the light emission control and the sound output control but also the execution control of the display effect synchronized with it is performed in the display control. will be The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing pair waiting control processing in this embodiment, which is executed in the sound and light side MPU 112 .

First, in step S3301, similarly to step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving. Similar to step S2302 in the above embodiment, the pair waiting control process is terminated after the return start process is executed for both the curtain board drive units 56a and 56b.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not one of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b is ON, as in step S2303 in the first embodiment. . If a negative determination is made in step S3303, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is. A stop process is executed for the corresponding curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b.

In the following step S3305, it is determined whether both adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON, as in step S2305 in the first embodiment. If a negative determination is made in step S3305, this pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3306, similarly to step S2306 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the third stage effect flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, in step S3307, similarly to step S2307 in the first embodiment, the light emission data for the third stage effect is read out, and in step S3308 , similar to step S2308 in the first embodiment, readout processing of the sound output data for the third stage effect is executed. After that, in step S3309, a progress command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. FIG. Then, in step S3310, as in step S2309 in the first embodiment, the pair waiting control flag is cleared to "0" and the third stage control flag is set to "1". End the process. If a negative determination is made in step S3306, the pair waiting control flag is cleared to "0" and the return control flag is set to "1" in step S3311, as in step S2310 in the first embodiment. is set, the pair waiting control process is terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing command handling processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the display side MPU 122 .

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not a progress command has been received from the MPU 112 on the sound and light side. If a progress command has been received, in step S3402, in the currently set pattern data table, skip processing to the start pointer information of the rendering range corresponding to the progress command is executed. End the process.

In the pattern data table, the contents of the tasks corresponding to the execution of the curtain board presentation by the third stage presentation are set. In this case, the content of the task is set to continue displaying the same image before the third stage operation, or to continue looping a predetermined moving image before the third stage operation. The setting is canceled when the command is received, and the display effect corresponding to the third stage operation is started. As a result, the execution control of the display effect is based on the display control with the passage of time, and the start of the third stage operation is exceptionally controlled based on the start command from the sound and light side MPU 112. . With such a configuration, it becomes easier to synchronize the display effect with the operation of the movable panel 52 in the structure for performing the display effect corresponding to the third-step operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, other processing is executed in step S3403, and then this command handling processing ends. In the other processes, the same processes as steps S801 to S811 of the command handling process (FIG. 17) in the first embodiment are executed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as an effect for the game round, the pattern display device 31 performs a predetermined pattern variable display (specifically, a pattern in which all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 start the pattern variable display at high speed). , the variable display is terminated, and the unit variable display in which a predetermined stop symbol is stop-displayed can occur a plurality of times. Along with this, the processing contents of the master side command correspondence processing and the display side command correspondence processing in the sound and light side MPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Each of these corresponding processes will be described below. In the following description, the effect in which the unit variation display is performed multiple times in one game round is referred to as a pseudo game round effect, and each unit variation display time in the pseudo game round effect is referred to as a pseudo game round.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a command for variation and a type command have been received from the main MPU 92 . If these commands have been received, in step S3502, the game result and display duration are stored. The game result information is identified from the type command as in the first embodiment, and the display duration information is identified from the variation command.

In the following step S3503, it is determined whether or not the current display duration time corresponds to the execution of the pseudo game round effect. In other words, whether or not to execute the pseudo game round production is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, the main MPU 92 is more likely to select the display continuation time corresponding to the simulated game round effect in the case of the game round resulting in a big win and the game round in which the winning reach display is performed than in the other game rounds. It is configured. In addition, not only whether or not the pseudo game round effect is executed, but also the number of pseudo game rounds to be executed in the pseudo game round effect is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, the number of pseudo-game rounds is either 2, 3, or 4, and the game rounds that result in a big hit and the game rounds that display the outlier reach with a high expectation of the jackpot result are more likely to hit the jackpot. The number of pseudo-game rounds is greater than the game rounds in which the degree of expectation of the result is low and the out-of-reach display is displayed.

In the subsequent step S3504, the number of times of the pseudo game is stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM114. After that, in step S3505, advance notice lottery processing is executed. The content of this process is the same as that of step S603 in the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step S3506, the first stop symbol determination process is executed. The stop symbol determination process corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5 and the stop result that the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5. information, and information of the stop result corresponding to the pseudo game round other than the final round (for example, information of the stop result in which a predetermined symbol combination such as "3, 4, 1" is established on any of the activated lines), Determined as information on the results of this stoppage. Also, in step S3507, the first effect pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the effect pattern of the first pseudo-game round corresponding to the display duration time of the current game round is selected. Incidentally, the display continuation time of the first simulated game round is shorter than the display continuation time of the current game round.

In the following step S3508, information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S3507 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S3506 are written in the holding data area 161 of the RAM 114 on the sound and light side. Thereafter, in step S3509, similarly to step S607 in the first embodiment, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and in step S3510, step S608 in the first embodiment. Similarly, update processing of the number of games is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the same processing as steps S605 to S608 in the first embodiment is executed as the processing for non-winning in step S3511. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3501, when the processing of step S3510 is executed, or when the processing of step S3511 is executed, as other processing in step S3512, step Processing similar to that of steps S609 to S629 is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing display-side command handling processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received from the display-side MPU 122 . The fluctuation end command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound and light side MPU 112 when display control using the pattern data table read out when the display side MPU 122 receives the stop result command and the pattern command is completed. command. Also, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game round effect is being executed in the current game round. Also, in step S3603, it is determined whether or not the number of pseudo-games stored in the sound and light side RAM 114 in step S3504 of the master-side command correspondence processing is greater than the number of times of execution of the pseudo-games completed in the current game. judge.

If affirmative determinations are made in all steps S3601 to S3603, the process proceeds to step S3604. In step S3604, the current game result and display continuation time stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound/light RAM 114 are read. After that, in step S3605, the type of effect pattern of the pseudo-game round so far of the current game round is read.

In the subsequent step S3606, stop symbol determination processing corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, when the current pseudo-game round is not the final round, the same stop result information as in the first stop symbol determination process is selected, and when the current pseudo-game round is the final round. , the stop result information corresponding to the game result of the current game round is selected in the same manner as in step S604 in the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step S3607, the effect pattern determination process corresponding to the number of times of execution is executed. In the production pattern determination process, if the current pseudo-game round is not the final round, the production pattern corresponding to the display duration time of the current game round and the number of executions of the current pseudo-game round is selected. , When the current pseudo-game round is the final round, an effect pattern is selected in which the type of ready-to-win display corresponding to the display duration time of this time is executed. In addition, in the production pattern determination process, by referring to the information read in step S3605, the production pattern is selected so that a common production is executed in each pseudo game round. Specifically, when the notice display is performed in the first pseudo-game round, the notice display is also performed in the pseudo-game round to be executed after that in the current game round. In this case, it may be so arranged that the preview display with higher expectation of the result of the big win is performed in the pseudo game round on the rear side.

In the following step S3608, information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S3607 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S3606 are written in the holding data area 161 of the RAM 114 on the sound and light side. Thereafter, in step S3609, similarly to step S607 in the first embodiment, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and in step S3610, the number of execution times provided in the sound and light side RAM 114 is calculated. Add 1 to the counter value.

If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S3601, S3602, and S3603, or if the process of step S3610 is executed, in step S3611, as other processes, the display-side command in the first embodiment Steps S1201 to S1216 of the corresponding processing (FIG. 22) are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even when the pseudo game round effect is performed, the data table for the entirety of each pseudo game round is read by the display side MPU 122, and the sound and light side MPU 112 reads the data table on the display side. Control data is set according to commands transmitted from the MPU 122 during the pseudo game, and light emission control of various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed. As a result, even when the pseudo-game round effect is performed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for setting the data for control.

Also, at the start of each pseudo game round, the sound and light side MPU 112 determines an effect pattern based on the game result of the corresponding game round and the content of the pseudo game rounds that have been digested so far. As a result, in the configuration in which the effect pattern of the pseudo game round is determined based on the game result of the game round and the contents of the pseudo game rounds digested so far, the processing load for making the determination is reduced to the sound and light side MPU 112. can be distributed to Therefore, the processing load can be distributed.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) As the movable objects, similar to the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, a movable object that is driven by a slide operation drive unit to perform a sliding operation and is rotated by a rotation operation drive unit is provided, and the movable object slides on the movable object. When the sliding motion and the rotating motion are started simultaneously from their respective predetermined positions after the motion and the rotating motion are individually executed, the respective predetermined position detection sensors detect that they are arranged at the respective predetermined positions. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both operations are started simultaneously from . This makes it easier to synchronize the start of both operations.

(2) When the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b are asynchronously and individually rotated, and then the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are simultaneously started to rotate from their initial rotation positions, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both rotation operations are started at the same time after the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b have detected that they have been arranged. This makes it easier to synchronize the start of both rotation operations.

(3) When the detection sensor detects that the movable object is placed at a predetermined position, a predetermined effect is produced by another effect means, which is at least one of a sound output effect, a light emission effect, and a display effect. When focusing on the effect of facilitating synchronization of the motion of the movable object with the rendering of other rendering means by executing A configuration having only a single drive target may also be used.

(4) A configuration in which when a plurality of objects to be driven is detected by the detection sensors corresponding to each of the objects to be driven and arranged at a predetermined position, the objects to be driven perform predetermined operations in synchronization with each other. It may be applied to a configuration in which there are four or more objects to be driven.

(5) When the curtain plate movable object 52 executes the second stage operation and then executes the third stage operation, the pair of slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b after being displaced to the initial position side. However, instead of this, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided at or near the limit position, and when the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are displaced to the limit position side, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b After the pair of slide members 55a and 55b are detected, the movable member 52 may move horizontally toward the initial position side or toward the limit position side as the third stage operation.

(6) When a detection sensor corresponding to each of the plurality of objects to be driven detects that the plurality of objects to be driven is placed at a predetermined position, the plurality of objects to be driven is configured to perform a predetermined operation in synchronization with the plurality of objects to be driven. It is also possible to apply a configuration in which each drive target operates an individual movable object instead of the configuration in which one curtain plate movable object 52 is operated.

(7) When the stop command flag is set to "1" while the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotating, when one of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is turned ON, A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of both disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped. In this case, it is not necessary to set the limit range as in the first embodiment, and it is not necessary to store the history of the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as in the second embodiment. .

(8) In a configuration in which at least one of the outer edge shape and the ornamental shape does not match between the predetermined rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, but both the outer edge shape and the ornamental shape match between the specific rotation positions. , each of these specific rotational positions may be the initial rotational positions of the disk movable members 62a and 62b. In this case, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have a plurality of initial rotation positions. In this configuration, a rotation initial position sensor may be provided at each rotation initial position. In this case, variations in the rotation period of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b according to the timing at which the stop command flag is set to "1" are provided. can be increased.

Further, the limit range may be provided so as to include the detection range of each initial rotation position sensor, and each limit range may not include adjacent limit ranges around the rotation axis. In addition, by setting the number of steps for stop cancellation determination when the stop is restricted to the number of steps before the detection range of the rotation initial position sensor existing next to the rotation axis around the rotation axis, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b It is possible to shorten the period during which the stop is restricted.

(9) The number of disk movable objects 62a and 62b to be synchronized is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more.

(10) A configuration for synchronizing and stopping the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b is arranged so that a plurality of movable objects reciprocating on a straight line or a curved line and having an initial position on the reciprocating path are synchronously stopped. You may apply as a structure for making it.

(11) In the second embodiment, when the stop command flag is set to "1" and any of the history calculation results has data content to be stopped, both disk movable objects A configuration in which the rotation of 62a and 62b is stopped may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to shorten the period from when the stop command flag is set to "1" to when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b stop rotating.

(12) In the above-described second embodiment, the number of areas for storing the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as histories for each disk movable object 62a and 62b is three, but the number of areas may be one. , may be two, or may be four or more. In this case, if there are two or more, it is possible to stop the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b when the ON state of the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b is confirmed a plurality of times. When the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on for some reason, the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is prevented from occurring. Further, if the number is three or more, it is possible to specify the rise or fall of the signals of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b while exhibiting the effect of the two or more. However, in a configuration with three or more sensors, if data indicating that the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b are in the detection state are continuously set, the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b rise or A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of each of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped regardless of whether or not it corresponds to falling.

In addition, the number of areas for storing the detection results as a history is determined by the monitoring of the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b, which can occur in the situation where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b exist within the detection range of the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b. It is preferable to make it within the range of the number of times of treatment. In this case, if the result corresponding to non-detection of the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b is stored in the most recent area, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not controlled to stop. Thus, even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b stop rotating after confirming the history, the stop position can be limited within the detection range of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b.

(13) In the second embodiment, it is not essential to always monitor the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b by the sound and light side MPU 112. The monitoring of the detection results of the sensors 69a and 69b may be started, and the monitoring of the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is started when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start the return operation. may be configured.

(14) The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are defective, and the rotation positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are grasped only from the number of steps. may be configured to specify. In this case, when the number of steps when the stop command flag is set to "1" is a specific number of steps, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped synchronously after being displaced by a predetermined number of steps. By doing so, it is possible to synchronize and stop the disk movable objects 62a and 62b at the initial rotation positions grasped from the number of steps, for example.

(15) At the start of a series of effects such as a game cycle or opening/closing execution mode, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not receive a command corresponding to the start of the series of effects from the display side MPU 122, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 45 may be started. In particular, in a situation where the reservation information is not stored in the reservation area RE, when a prize is won in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 and a game cycle is started, the start timing of the game cycle is arbitrary timing. Therefore, the display-side MPU 122 cannot transmit in advance a command corresponding to the start of a game round. In this case, at the start of the series of effects as described above, by controlling the light emission of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 without receiving a command from the display side MPU 122, These effects are less likely to be delayed with respect to the start timing of the game round.

(16) The display-side MPU 122 only outputs to the sound and light-side MPU 112 a command indicating that the timing corresponds to the switching of the presentation content, and the timing corresponding to the switching corresponds to any presentation content. It may be configured to be specified in the sound and light side MPU 112 whether or not. For example, the sound and light side MPU 112 counts the number of command transmissions from the display side MPU 122 after the start of the game cycle or the opening/closing execution mode, and from the measurement result, the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 corresponds to which effect content. A configuration is conceivable that specifies whether switching is supported. Specifically, in a situation where the data table shown in FIG. command reception corresponds to the start of the notice effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the content of commands transmitted from the display-side MPU 122, and to shorten the period required for command transmission, for example.

(17) As data for executing a series of effects in game times and opening/closing execution modes, relatively longer data is set in the RAM even if it is not the display side MPU 122 but the sound and light side MPU 112. good. In this case, the overall flow of the series of performances is controlled according to the data table set in the sound and light side MPU 112, and when the execution timing of each performance range included in the series of performances comes, the sound and light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 When the command is received by the display side MPU 122, the display side MPU 122 reads the control data for the effect range corresponding to the command and controls the execution of the effect in the effect range.

(18) The sound and light side MPU 112 may be configured to constantly monitor whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated. In this case, when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 112, and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the operation is during the operation effective period. done. This configuration eliminates the need for the display-side MPU 122 to transmit the valid operation start command and the valid operation end command.

(19) When an operation generation command for the effect operation device 48 is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 112, and if the operation generation command is within the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48, the display side MPU 122 issues an operation valid command. Instead of sending the command, an operation effect command may be started and an operation effect command may be transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 112 . In this configuration, the display-side MPU 122 does not need to transmit an operation enable command, and the sound/light-side MPU 112 does not need to transmit an execution permission command.

(20) When an operation enable command is received from the display-side MPU 122, the sound and light-side MPU 112 starts reading light emission control data and sound output control data corresponding to the operation effect. When a command is received, the MPU 112 on the sound and light side may be configured to perform light emission control and sound output control using data that has been read.

(21) The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to control means other than the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, for example, the main side MPU 92. Even in this case, in the configuration in which the information as to whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112 before the display side MPU 122, the configuration described in each of the above embodiments is used. is preferably applied.

Also, the effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to the display side MPU 122 instead of the sound and light side MPU 112 . In this case, if the sound and light side MPU 112 decides the content of the operation effect, it is necessary to perform two-way communication between the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 before executing the operation effect. occurs.

(22) The timing at which the display-side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound and light-side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating a change in the contents of the effect, but each time a predetermined number of frames are consumed, that is, the display-side MPU 122 A command may be transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound and light-side MPU 112 every time the pattern display device 31 reaches a predetermined number of times when the control execution timing of the pattern display device 31 is reached. In this case, the command includes data corresponding to the current pointer information of the data table read out by the display side MPU 122, for example, the type of pattern displayed on the pattern display device 31, the content of the background image, and other than the pattern. A configuration may be adopted in which frame contents such as the type of character and the contents of the action of the character are set. Then, the sound/light-side MPU 112 may be configured to specify light emission data, sound output data, and the like to be set from the contents of the frame included in the command. According to this configuration, the display-side MPU 122 only needs to periodically transmit a command, and furthermore, it only needs to set the frame content in the command. It is possible to simplify the processing.

It should be noted that instead of transmitting the command periodically every frame, the command can be transmitted once in a plurality of specific number of frames such as 10 frames or 100 frames. It is possible to reduce the frequency.

Further, in this configuration, since a command for setting light emission data and sound output data in advance is not transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112, these light emission data and sound output data are set at the timing of receiving the command. Setting will start.

(23) The timing at which the display-side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound and light-side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the change in the effect contents, and the effect period of the data table read out by the display-side MPU 122 is A command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound and light side MPU 112 at each timing corresponding to the start of each divided range, and the sound and light side MPU 112 sets control data corresponding to the divided range. It may be configured to be For example, if the performance period of the data table is divided into the first half and the second half, the command is transmitted at the timing corresponding to the start of the first half divided range, and the command is transmitted at the timing corresponding to the start of the second half divided range. will be sent. According to this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for specifying the command transmission timing in the display-side MPU 122 .

(24) In the display side MPU 122, instead of reading out the entire data table corresponding to the series of game rounds and the opening and closing execution mode all at once, Although the data table corresponding to the longer period is read out, it may correspond to a shorter period than the entire period corresponding to the series of effects. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 in response to receiving a command from the main side MPU 92, the display side MPU 122 may read the data table for each command.

In this case, when the main side MPU 92 transmits a variation command and a type command during a game round, the display side MPU 122 reads out the data table from the start of the game round to the timing just before the final stop display of the symbols. Then, when the master side MPU 92 transmits the final stop command, the display side MPU 122 may read out the data table for the period of the final stop display of the game cycle.

Further, during the opening/closing execution mode, when the main side MPU 92 transmits an opening command, the display side MPU 122 stores a data table from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the start of the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 22. When the master side MPU 92 transmits an open command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the opening time, and when the master side MPU 92 transmits a close command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table. When the data table corresponding to the interval is read out and the main side MPU 92 transmits the ending command, the display side MPU 122 reads out the data table from the start of the ending effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Even with this configuration, in the sound and light side MPU 112, light emission data and sound output data corresponding to a shorter period than the data table read out in the display side MPU 122 are displayed in accordance with commands transmitted from the display side MPU 122 each time. It is possible to suppress the required storage capacity by setting the configuration. In this configuration, the corresponding period of the light emission data and the sound output data read by the sound and light side MPU 112 may match the corresponding period of the data table read out by the display side MPU 122 for some rendering ranges. good.

(25) The command transmitted from the master side MPU 92 may be configured to be received not only by the sound and light side MPU 112 but also by the display side MPU 122 . In this case, when a command is transmitted from the master side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits to the display side MPU 122 a command indicating that the command from the main side MPU 92 was normally received, and the display side MPU 122 receives the command. A configuration may be adopted in which, when the command is received from the sound and light side MPU 112 , the data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92 is read. In this case, the sound and light side MPU 112 may read a data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92, but similarly to the above embodiments, the data table may be set according to the command. Instead, by setting light emission data and sound output data corresponding to a partial rendering range according to a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the necessary storage capacity can be reduced. Further, in this configuration, when an event to be notified such as an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a notification command is sent to both the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, and these sound and light side MPU 112 and When the display-side MPU 122 receives the notification command, it is configured so that the notification by the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 and the notification by the pattern display device 31 are started without waiting for the transmission of the command from the other party. good too.

(26) The holding data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM 114 may be configured to measure the number of times a predetermined advance notice display or a predetermined reach display is performed. In this case, for example, when a predetermined advance notice display is not executed even though the predetermined number of game rounds have been played, the probability of selection of the predetermined advance notice display may be increased. may be forcibly selected.

(27) When the information on the game result of the game round is stored in the held data area 161 of the sound and light side RAM 114, and the sound and light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the execution possible timing of the fixed effect from the display side MPU 122. Although it is determined whether or not to execute the fixed effect by referring to the game result information stored and retained in the retained data area 161, the display side MPU 122 is not limited to this. By transmitting a command based on the information of the game result, the sound and light side MPU 112 may be configured to perform execution control of the fixed effect when receiving a command corresponding to the execution of the fixed effect from the display side MPU 122 .

(28) Even when the sound/light-side MPU 112 receives the confirmation execution command from the display-side MPU 122, by referring to the game result information of the game round stored and held in the holding data area 161, the confirmation effect is executed. may be configured to determine whether or not to execute In this case, even if some kind of abnormality occurs and the confirmation effect is executed by the symbol display device 31 in spite of the fact that it is not a big win result, the execution of the confirmation effect in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is not performed. can be prevented. Also, at this time, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 may notify that the confirmation effect in the pattern display device 31 is not a normal operation.

(29) In the sound and light side MPU 112, the configuration for reading out a plurality of control data in response to one command from the display side MPU 122 is added to or instead of the sound output data readout process for the light emission data readout process. may apply. Also, the number of control data read for one command is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(30) The display-side MPU 122 reads control data corresponding to a longer period than the control data set at once in the sound and light side MPU 112, and the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits a command from the display side MPU 122. In the case where control data corresponding to a part of the effect range is set according to the above, when focusing on the effect of reducing the storage capacity for setting the control data, the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display-side MPU 122 need not be two-way communication. For example, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the display side MPU 122 is configured to exist upstream of the sound and light side MPU 112 in the communication direction. When the data table for the entire effect is read out and the control data corresponding to the partial effect range is set in the sound/light side MPU 112 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the sound The communication method between the light-side MPU 112 and the display-side MPU 122 may not be two-way communication.

(31) Since the communication method between the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is two-way communication, between the effect executed and controlled by the sound and light side MPU 112 and the effect executed and controlled by the display side MPU 122 If attention is focused on the effect of making deviation less likely to occur, the configuration may be such that both the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 read data tables corresponding to the entire series of effects. In this case, for example, one of the sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not to start execution control of a predetermined effect range in accordance with a command transmitted from the other, and the start timing is reached. Pointer information about the entire data table that has already been read out may be updated to information corresponding to the start timing of the predetermined rendering range.

(32) The configuration of deriving the control information group by applying the setting information to the original information may be applied to the sound output data in addition to or instead of the light emission data. It may be applied to drive data. For example, when applied to drive data for controlling the drive of a movable object, original data that defines the operation contents of the switching destination when the operation contents of the movable object are sequentially switched, and a plurality of switching data that are defined in the original data. Start reference data that indicates from which action content of the switching destination the action of the movable object is to be started from among the action content of the switching destination, and continuation when continuing the action content of the switching destination specified in the original data At least continuation reference data indicating time are prepared, and by combining them, more drive data than the number of original data, start reference data, and continuation reference data may be derived.

(33) In the lighting data group 151, the list data group 151e and the group data group 151f may be defective. In this case, simplification of the processing for creating the light emission data is achieved.

(34) A configuration may be adopted in which the priority of the sound output side is set even between the sound output data for notification. In this case, only the sound output data for notification with the highest priority may be output. It may be a target configuration. In this configuration, for example, among the various events to be notified, an act of illegally trying to receive a privilege can be notified by notifying that the lower tray 47a is full or opening the gaming machine main body 12. It is possible to give priority to the status notification of the pachinko machine 10, such as the notification that the game is being played, and to promptly prompt countermeasures against the fraudulent act.

(35) In place of the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162, there is an abnormality notification area for notifying an abnormality when an event corresponding to a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 occurs, and the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to separately provide a status notification area for performing status notification when an event other than the event corresponding to the fraudulent act occurs. In this case, by setting the light emitting side priority of the abnormality notification area higher than the light emitting side priority of the state notification area, it is possible to execute the abnormality notification with the highest priority. Further, by making the light-emitting side priority of the state notification area higher than the light-emitting side priority of the base area 162a and the interrupt area 162b, it becomes possible to execute the state notification with priority over the effect. .

(36) The display-side MPU 122 is not limited to a configuration that transmits commands to the sound and light-side MPU 112 according to the pattern data table at each timing during the execution of the effect according to the pattern data table. Instead, the command may be transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112 after the pattern data table is read and before the performance corresponding to the pattern data table is started. For example, a command for reading control data for starting an effect corresponding to the pattern data table is sent in advance before execution control of the effect is started in the display side MPU 122, and then, The command may be transmitted again at a predetermined timing during the execution of the effect according to the pattern data table.

(37) The sound and light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may be arranged on the same substrate. In this case, the VDP 125, the character ROM 126, and the video RAM 127 may be provided on the same substrate, or may be provided on separate substrates.

(38) Although the special electric prize-winning device 22 is completely closed while the special electric prize-winning device 22 is closed, a part of the special electric prize-winning device 22 may not be closed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls can enter the special electric prize winning device 22 through a part of the area even when it is closed. , it may be configured such that winning of game balls to the special electric winning device 22 is not possible.

(39) In place of the configuration in which the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 24 while the general electric accessory 24a is closed, the game can be played to the lower operation opening 24 even while the general electric accessory 24a is closed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which winning of a ball can occur. However, the ease of winning the prize must be lower than that during the opening of the universal electrical accessory 24a.

(40) Hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize at the upper operation port 23 and hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize at the lower operation port 24 are stored separately, and A configuration may be applied in which the pending information on the 24 side is preferentially digested, or conversely, a configuration may be applied in which the pending information on the upper working port 23 side is preferentially digested. Arrangements in which the order of acquisition is digested regardless of whether it is the port 23 or the lower working port 24 may be applied.

In the above configuration, the first working port corresponding to the upper working port 23 and the second working port corresponding to the lower working port 24 are arranged side by side instead of vertically arranging the plurality of working ports. A configuration in which they are arranged side by side may be employed, or a configuration in which both of these operating ports are arranged side by side obliquely may be employed. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the shooting handle 41, both working openings may be spaced apart so that only winning in the first working opening or only winning in the second working opening can be aimed.

Further, in the above configuration, the special figure display unit 33, the first display area for displaying the result of the validity determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23, based on the winning to the lower working port 24 You may provide the 2nd display area which displays the result of the right/wrong determination of the acquired pending|holding information. In this case, prior to the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 becoming the target of the win-or-fail judgment, or based on the fact that it became the target of the win-or-fail judgment, the variation display of the pattern in the first display area is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/loss determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game round is terminated. In addition, prior to the pending information acquired based on the winning of the lower opening 24 becoming the target of the win-or-fail judgment, or based on the fact that it became the target of the win-or-fail judgment, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. As soon as it is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/loss determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game round is terminated.

(41) When the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize at the upper operation port 23 is subject to the judgment of success or failure, and the case where the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize at the lower operation port 24 is valid A configuration may be adopted in which the profit that the player obtains differs depending on whether the player is the target of the determination. For example, when the hold information on the side of the upper operation port 23 is the target of the judgment of success or failure, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the reservation information on the side of the lower operation port 24 is the object of the judgment of success or failure. When a jackpot is won, it may be distributed to one of the maximum advantage jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result and the low probability jackpot result.

Moreover, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, a configuration in which only one operating port is provided may be employed.

(42) Instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 103 is located upstream of the display control device 120 in the communication direction when the main control device 90 is used as a reference, the display control device 120 It may be configured to exist on the upstream side in the communication direction. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be employed, and the function of one of these two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 90 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 90 . Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 90 to the sound emission control device 103 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 103 to the display control device 120 are arbitrary.

(43) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 31, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by combining all or part of the above-described modes. good.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed in the special figure display unit 33, but instead of this, the special figure display unit 33 may be defective. Even if it is a game result, it may be configured to display a common stop result in the special figure display unit 33, and by randomly displaying the stop result in the special figure display unit 33, As a result, the special figure display unit A configuration may be adopted in which it is not possible to identify the game result from the display of 33 .

(45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which a general electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters the machine to give a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A first control means (sound and light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect means (speaker section 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting section groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling second effect means (symbol display device 31);
with
bidirectional communication is possible between the first control means and the second control means,
Based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, the first control means is the first side execution means (in the sound and light side MPU 112 function to execute light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and movable object control processing),
The second control means causes the second effect means to perform an effect in a period overlapping at least a part of the predetermined period based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. A game machine characterized by comprising side execution means (a function for executing task processing in the display side MPU 122).

According to feature A1, the first control means controls the execution of the effect in the first effect means based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, and the second control means controls the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. Based on this, the execution of the effect in the second effect means is controlled. As a result, when the first effect means and the second effect means execute effects in the same period, it is difficult for the effects to be out of sync with each other. As described above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature A2. Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation device 48) that accepts the input operation of the player,
Information as to whether or not the operation receiving means has accepted an input operation is input to the first control means,
The first control means is capable of transmitting operation response transmission information (operation generation command) corresponding to acceptance of an input operation by the operation receiving means,
The second side execution means is a second side operation response execution means ( a function of executing the processing of step S909 in the display side MPU 122),
The second control means, when the second effect means executes an effect corresponding to the input operation being accepted by the operation receiving means, transmits execution transmission information (operation effect command) corresponding to the effect. can be sent, and
The first side execution means, after the second control means transmits the execution transmission information, the first side operation corresponding execution means (sound The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S1306 in the light-side MPU 112 .

According to feature A2, in the configuration in which when an input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means, the corresponding effect is executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means, the second control means performs the first After the control means transmits the operation corresponding transmission information, the second effect means performs an effect corresponding to the operation. A performance corresponding to the operation is performed by the performance means. In such a configuration in which information as to whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means is input to the first control means, the first control means waits until the second control means transmits the execution transmission information. Since the configuration is such that the performance corresponding to the operation is executed from the beginning, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in each performance corresponding to the operation.

Feature A3. The first control means starts monitoring whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means when the second control means transmits the operation monitoring transmission information (operation effective start command). The game machine according to feature A2, wherein the operation response transmission information can be transmitted when an input operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means during the monitoring period.

According to feature A3, the first control means only needs to start monitoring whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means when the second control means transmits the operation monitoring transmission information. It is no longer necessary for the means to independently specify the start timing of the monitoring. As a result, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in a configuration that makes it difficult for the performance corresponding to the operation to deviate. In addition, since the entity that determines the start timing of various processes in the first control means is centralized in the second control means, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A4. When the first control means transmits the operation response transmission information, the second control means accepts an input operation in the operation reception means corresponding to the operation response transmission information during the valid period of the input operation. Equipped with validity determination means (function for executing the processing of step S906 in the display side MPU 122) for determining whether or not
The second side operation corresponding executing means causes the second effect means to produce an effect corresponding to the input operation being accepted by the operation receiving means after the validity determination means determines that the input operation is valid. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that it is adapted to be executed.

According to feature A4, not only the first control means but also the second control means determines whether or not the input operation is received by the operation receiving means during the effective period of the input operation. This reduces the possibility that an effect corresponding to the operation will be executed even though no input operation is performed on the operation receiving means during the valid period.

Feature A5. The second control means can transmit valid transmission information (operation valid command) when the validity determination means determines that it is valid,
The first control means can transmit permission transmission information (execution permission command) when the second control means transmits the valid transmission information,
When the first control means transmits the permission transmission information, the second side operation response executing means provides the second effect means with an effect corresponding to the acceptance of the input operation by the operation receiving means. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that it is executed by

According to the feature A5, since it is clear that the two-way communication between the first control means and the second control means is normal, the effect corresponding to the operation is started. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the performance corresponding to the operation is executed even though the input operation to the operation receiving means is not performed.

Feature A6. The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information capable of specifying timing for executing the effect of the predetermined period in the first effect means. machine.

According to feature A6, the first control means may control the execution of the effect of the first effect means in accordance with the execution timing of the effect determined by the second control means. no longer need to specify This reduces the processing load in comparison with the case where the execution timing of the performance can be independently specified by each of the first control means and the second control means in a configuration that makes it difficult for the two performances to be out of sync. is planned.

Feature A7. The first effect means can execute any one of a plurality of types of effect contents as the effect for the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information in a manner capable of specifying a type of effect content to be executed as the effect for the predetermined period.

According to feature A7, the first control means not only follows the performance execution timing determined by the second control means, but also the content of the performance to be executed may follow the content determined by the second control means. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the content of the presentation is determined independently by one control means.

Feature A8. The second side execution means controls the execution of the effect in the second effect means every time the control execution timing comes,
The second control means does not transmit the transmission information to the first control means each time the control execution timing comes, but rather transmits the transmission information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. The game machine according to feature A6 or A7, which transmits information.

According to feature A8, in the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the first control means according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, the second control means transmits the transmission information each time the control execution timing comes. is transmitted, but the transmission information is transmitted when the predetermined control execution timing comes, so it is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means. This reduces the processing load on the second control means.

Feature A9. The first control means includes a lottery execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S603 to S605 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing lottery processing,
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process,
Any one of the characteristics A1 to A8, wherein the second effect means performs a effect in a period overlapping at least a part of the predetermined period with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The game machine described.

According to the feature A9, although the lottery process is executed in the first control means, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before executing the effect. Since it is the structure which carries out, it becomes possible to suppress that each production|presentation in a 1st production|presentation means and a 2nd production|presentation means will differ.

Feature A10. Equipped with progress control means (main side MPU 92) that controls the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the lottery executing means executes the lottery processing based on the content of the transmission information transmitted by the progress control means.

According to the feature A10, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means exists on the upstream side of communication with respect to the second control means. Since it is a configuration in which the effect is executed after waiting for the transmission of the transmission information, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in each effect in the first effect means and the second effect means. becomes.

Feature A11. A progress control means (main side MPU 92) that transmits transmission information toward the first control means and does not transmit toward the second control means,
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with the content corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the second effect means performs the effect in the predetermined period with contents corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. machine.

According to the feature A11, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means exists on the upstream side of communication with respect to the second control means. Since it is a configuration in which the effect is executed after waiting for the transmission of the transmission information, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in each effect in the first effect means and the second effect means. becomes.

Feature A12. When a predetermined start opportunity is reached, the second execution means performs the second effect means during a specific duration (during a game run, during opening/closing execution mode) that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined period. is to execute a specific range effect (performance for game times, effect for opening and closing execution mode),
The second control means controls a group of specific control information (pattern data table, opening data table) used to cause the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start opportunity is reached. second side setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S802 and S806 in the display side MPU 122) for setting the table),
The first side execution means causes the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the specific range effect during the specific duration period,
The first control means includes first side setting means (sound and light a function of executing light emission data readout processing and sound output data readout processing in the side MPU 112),
The first-side setting means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed during the specified duration at once, but the second control means sets each control information during the specified duration. Means for setting a group of control information corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (setting light emission data in the interrupt area 162b in the sound and light side MPU 112), triggered by the transmission of the transmission information at the timing function, and a function of setting sound output data from the data group 152f at the time of fixed effect).

According to the feature A12, the control information group corresponding to the entire presentation executed in the specific duration is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the side of the first control means, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specified continuation period is determined according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specified continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the performance to be executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the control information groups corresponding to the whole are set respectively on the first control means side and the second control means side. becomes possible.

Feature A13. The specific range effect is configured to include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, reach display, etc.) with different effects modes,
The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set corresponding to the plurality of rendering ranges.

According to feature A13, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature A14. The specified control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specified duration period, and in correspondence with these control execution timings, is sent to the first control means The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the transmission timing of the transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to feature A14, by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing in the second control means, it is possible to perform execution control of the specific range effect, and transmit information directed to the first control means. can also be specified. Therefore, the information to be referred to by the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature A15. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific duration when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. and
Characteristic A12, characterized in that the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. The game machine according to any one of A14.

According to feature A15, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has reached a predetermined start trigger, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect to be executed in the specified duration period is set to the second control means. By adopting a configuration in which the processing is performed on the control means side, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature A16. The first side setting means, in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger, sets the transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect to the first stage. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound and light side MPU 112 function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature A15, wherein the first side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. machine.

According to feature A16, in the configuration in which the first control means identifies that a predetermined start trigger has been reached, the first control means deliberately waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before performing the specific range presentation. Since the configuration is such that an effect corresponding to is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature A17. The first control means is
notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (function for executing the process of step S625 in the sound and light side MPU 112 )When,
Notification execution means for causing the first effect means to perform notification regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S623, S624, S1602, and S1809 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A17, when starting the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The notification is independently started by the first control means without waiting until it is done. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the first effect means can start the notification. It becomes possible.

Feature A18. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
The predetermined start opportunity is when the privilege lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed with the execution of the privilege lottery process as a trigger,
Features A12 to A17, characterized in that the first control means stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the specific range effect of the specific duration during the specific duration during the specific duration. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature A18, in the configuration in which the second control means sets the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific duration, the first control means determines the result of the privilege lottery process. Information is stored. As a result, in a configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature A19. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific duration period comes regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process,
When the transmission information is received, the first control means is a correspondence determination means (sound and light function to execute the processing of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is a means (sound and light side MPU 112 A gaming machine according to feature A18, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 in and executing the processing of step S1208.

According to feature A19, since the second control means only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control means without considering the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information can be optimized. be done. Further, the first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process, and determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the performance, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information about the second control means is optimized as described above, the performance corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the first control means side. It becomes possible to perform execution control.

Feature A20. The second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information corresponding to the content of the presentation to be performed by the second presentation means,
The first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect when the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to performing a specific effect (fixed effect) by the second effect means. means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the bonus lottery process A gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to feature A20, when a specific effect is performed by the second effect means, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process on the side of the first control means, Execution control of the performance corresponding to the content of the specific performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to matching of the contents of the effects between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause deviations in the effects.

Feature A21. The first side setting means is capable of setting a control information group corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific duration period, from the content of the one piece of transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A20, characterized by:

According to feature A21, it is possible to reduce the frequency of transmission of transmission information in the second control means.

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

In the configuration in which the presentation is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

In particular, when the configuration of feature A12 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is likely to attract the player's attention, the effect of communication abnormality is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker section 45) and light emitting means (light emitting section groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Here, the processing load of the sound output control of the sound output means or the light emission control of the light emitting means is lower than that of the display control of the display means. In this case, in the configuration having the feature A2, the information as to whether or not the operation receiving means has accepted the input operation is input to the first control means for controlling at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means. . As a result, the second control means having a relatively high processing load does not need to monitor the operation receiving means, thereby reducing the processing load of the second control means.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A first control means (sound and light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect means (speaker section 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting section groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling second effect means (symbol display device 31);
with
The second control means is
When a predetermined start trigger occurs, the second effect means executes a specific range effect (effect for the game cycle, effect for the open/close execution mode) during a specific duration (during the game cycle, during the opening/closing execution mode). second-side execution means (function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122) to cause
A second control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for executing the specific range effect by the second effect means when the predetermined start opportunity is reached. side setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S802 and S806 in the display side MPU 122);
with
The first control means is
First side execution means (executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object control processing in the sound and light side MPU 112) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the specific range effect in the specific duration period function) and
The first side setting means (reading of light emission data in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for executing the effect by the first effect means during the specific continuation period processing and reading processing of sound output data);
with
The first-side setting means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed during the specified duration at once, but the second control means sets each control information during the specified duration. Means for setting a group of control information corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (setting light emission data in the interrupt area 162b in the sound and light side MPU 112), triggered by the transmission of the transmission information at the timing function, and a function of setting sound output data from the data group 152f at the time of fixed effect).

According to feature B1, since the first control means is configured to control the execution of the effect of the first effect means according to the transmission information output from the second control means each time, the first effect means and the second effect means are controlled. When the performances are executed in the same period respectively, it becomes difficult for the performances of the two to be out of sync.

In this case, the second control means sets the control information group corresponding to the entire performance to be executed in the specific duration period. On the other hand, on the side of the first control means, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specified continuation period is determined according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specified continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the performance to be executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the control information groups corresponding to the whole are set respectively on the first control means side and the second control means side. becomes possible.

As described above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature B2. The specific range effect is configured to include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, reach display, etc.) with different effects modes,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set corresponding to the plurality of rendering ranges.

According to feature B2, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature B3. The specified control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specified duration period, and in correspondence with these control execution timings, is sent to the first control means The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the transmission timing of the transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to feature B3, by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing in the second control means, it is possible to perform execution control of the specific range effect, and transmit information directed to the first control means. can also be specified. Therefore, the information to be referred to by the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature B4. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific duration when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. and
Characteristic B1, wherein the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. The game machine according to any one of B3.

According to feature B4, in the configuration for specifying that a predetermined start trigger has occurred on the side of the first control means, setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire performance to be executed in the specified duration period is performed in the second control means. By adopting a configuration in which the processing is performed on the control means side, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature B5. The first side setting means, in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger, sets the transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect to the first stage. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound and light side MPU 112 function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature B4, wherein the first side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. machine.

According to feature B5, in the configuration in which the first control means specifies that a predetermined start trigger has occurred, the first control means deliberately waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before performing the specific range presentation. Since the configuration is such that an effect corresponding to is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature B6. The first control means is
notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (function for executing the process of step S625 in the sound and light side MPU 112 )When,
Notification execution means for causing the first effect means to perform notification regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S623, S624, S1602, and S1809 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B6, when starting the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The notification is independently started by the first control means without waiting until it is done. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the first effect means can start the notification. It becomes possible.

Feature B7. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
The predetermined start opportunity is when the privilege lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed with the execution of the privilege lottery process as a trigger,
Features B1 to B6, characterized in that the first control means stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered execution of the specific range effect of the specific duration during the specific duration during the specific duration. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the second control means sets the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration period, the first control means determines the result of the privilege lottery process. Information is stored. As a result, in a configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature B8. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific duration period comes regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process,
When the transmission information is received, the first control means is a correspondence determination means (sound and light function to execute the processing of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is a means (sound and light side MPU 112 A gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 in and executing the processing of step S1208.

According to feature B8, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information to the first control means without considering the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information can be optimized. be done. Further, the first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process, and determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the performance, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information about the second control means is optimized as described above, the performance corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the side of the first control means. It becomes possible to perform execution control.

Feature B9. The second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information corresponding to the content of the presentation to be performed by the second presentation means,
The first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect when the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to performing a specific effect (fixed effect) by the second effect means. means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the bonus lottery process The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to the characteristic B9, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side performs the specific effect regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Execution control of the performance corresponding to the content of the specific performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to matching of the contents of the effects between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause deviations in the effects.

Feature B10. The first side setting means is capable of setting a control information group corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific duration period, from the content of the one piece of transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized by:

According to feature B10, it is possible to reduce the frequency of transmission of transmission information in the second control means.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

In the configuration in which the presentation is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

In particular, since the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration period is set in the second control means that controls the display of the display means, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, It is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is likely to attract the player's attention, the effect of communication abnormality is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker section 45) and light emitting means (light emitting section groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A first control means (sound and light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect means (speaker section 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting section groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling second effect means (symbol display device 31);
with
The first control means causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a specific duration (during a game round, during an open/close execution mode) when a predetermined start trigger occurs. a function of executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and movable object control processing in the side MPU 112,
The second control means is
Second side setting means (in display side MPU 122) for setting specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used to cause the second effect means to execute the effect during the specific continuation period a function to execute the processes of steps S802 and S806);
Every time the control execution timing comes, the second side execution means causes the second performance means to execute an effect during the specific continuation period by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the specific control information group. (a function of executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122);
Second side transmission means (display side MPU 122 for executing command setting processing) for transmitting transmission information to the first control means in accordance with the progress of the effect during the specified duration in the second effect means function) and
with
The first side execution means uses the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmission means to change the content of the performance to be executed by the first performance means during the specific duration period to the performance of the second performance means. It is possible to correspond to the content,
The second side transmission means does not transmit transmission information to the first control means each time the control execution timing comes, but transmits information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. A gaming machine characterized in that it transmits the

According to the feature C1, the first control means uses the transmission information transmitted from the second control means to change the contents of the effect to be executed by the first effect means during the specified duration to the content of the effect in the second effect means. , when each of the first effect means and the second effect means performs effects in the same period, it is difficult for the effects to be out of sync with each other.

In this case, the second control means does not transmit the transmission information each time the control execution timing comes, but rather transmits the transmission information when the predetermined control execution timing comes. It is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of the transmission information in. This reduces the processing load on the second control means.

As described above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature C2. The specified control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specified duration period, and in correspondence with these control execution timings, is sent to the first control means The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the transmission timing of the transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to feature C2, by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing in the second control means, it is possible to perform execution control of the performance during the specific duration period, and to direct the first control means It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, the information to be referred to by the second control means is aggregated, thereby reducing the processing load.

Feature C3. The specific range effects (effects for game rounds, effects for open/close execution mode) executed by the second effect means during the specific duration period include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, reach display, etc.),
The game according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the second side transmission means transmits the transmission information so that the first control means can specify the start timing of each effect range. machine.

According to the feature C3, the second control means only needs to transmit transmission information according to each performance range, so it is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of transmission information. Further, in the first control means, when making the content of the effect executed by the first effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the second effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, each effect range Since it suffices to perform the adjustment in units, it becomes easier to perform the adjustment.

Feature C4. Any one of the characteristics C1 to C3, wherein the first side execution means grasps the content of the effect to be executed during the specified duration from the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmission means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature C4, the first control means not only makes the content of the effect executed by the first effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the second effect means in accordance with the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, Since the content of the effect to be executed may follow the content determined by the second control means, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the content of the effect is independently determined by the first control means.

Feature C5. The first control means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed during the specified duration at once, but the second control means controls each timing during the specified duration. With the transmission of the transmission information as a trigger, the first side setting means (light emission data and a function of setting the sound output data from the set effect data group 152f).

According to the feature C5, the control information group corresponding to the entire presentation executed in the specific duration period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the side of the first control means, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specified continuation period is determined according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specified continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the performance to be executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the control information groups corresponding to the whole are set respectively on the first control means side and the second control means side. becomes possible.

Feature C6. The specific range effects (effects for game rounds, effects for open/close execution mode) executed by the second effect means during the specific duration period include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, reach display, etc.),
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set corresponding to the plurality of rendering ranges.

According to feature C6, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature C7. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect during the specific duration when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. is a
The characteristic feature C5 is characterized in that the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. Or the gaming machine described in C6.

According to feature C7, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has reached a predetermined start trigger, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect to be executed in the specified duration period is set to the second control means. By adopting a configuration in which the processing is performed on the control means side, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature C8. The first side setting means, in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger, sets the transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect to the first stage. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound and light side MPU 112 function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature C7, wherein the first side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. machine.

According to feature C8, in the configuration in which the first control means specifies that a predetermined start trigger has been reached, the first control means deliberately waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before performing the specific range presentation. Since the configuration is such that an effect corresponding to is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature C9. The first control means is
notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (function for executing the process of step S625 in the sound and light side MPU 112 )When,
Notification execution means for causing the first effect means to perform notification regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S623, S624, S1602, and S1809 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C9, when starting the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The notification is independently started by the first control means without waiting until it is done. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the first effect means can start the notification. It becomes possible.

Feature C10. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
The predetermined start opportunity is the case where the privilege lottery process is executed, and the effect during the specific continuous period is executed with the execution of the privilege lottery process as a trigger,
Any of the features C5 to C9, wherein the first control means stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the performance for the specific duration during the specific duration. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C10, in the configuration in which the second control means sets the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration period, the first control means determines the result of the privilege lottery process. Information is stored. As a result, in a configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature C11. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific duration period comes regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process,
The first control means, when receiving the transmission information, the response determination means ( function to execute the processing of step S1205 in the sound and light side MPU 112),
When the correspondence determining means determines that the content of the effect corresponding to the transmission information corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first side setting means controls control information corresponding to the transmission information. The gaming machine according to feature C10, further comprising means for setting a group (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 in the sound and light side MPU 112 and executing the process of step S1208).

According to the feature C11, the second control means only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control means without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process. be done. Further, the first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process, and determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the performance, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information about the second control means is optimized as described above, the performance corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the first control means side. It becomes possible to perform execution control.

Feature C12. The second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information corresponding to the content of the presentation to be performed by the second presentation means,
The first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect when the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to performing a specific effect (fixed effect) by the second effect means. means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the bonus lottery process A gaming machine according to feature C11, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

According to the feature C12, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process on the side of the first control means, the Execution control of the performance corresponding to the content of the specific performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to matching of the contents of the effects between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause deviations in the effects.

Feature C13. The first side setting means is capable of setting a control information group corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific duration period, from the content of the one piece of transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12, characterized by:

According to feature C13, it is possible to reduce the frequency of transmission of transmission information in the second control means.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

In the configuration in which the presentation is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

In particular, when the configuration of feature C5 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire presentation to be executed in the specific duration period is set in the second control means that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is likely to attract the player's attention, the influence of the occurrence of a communication abnormality is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature C15. The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker section 45) and light emission means (light emission section groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A first control means (sound and light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect means (speaker section 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting section groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling second effect means (symbol display device 31);
with
The second control means transmits predetermined transmission information to the first control means (display side MPU 122 function to execute command setting processing in
The first control means is
specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S1204 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for specifying that it is a predetermined timing when the second side transmitting means transmits the predetermined transmission information;
When the specifying means specifies that it is the predetermined timing, at least information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information (game result information stored in the holding data area 161) is used to perform a predetermined effect. content determination means (function of executing the processing of steps S1205 and S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for determining at least one of whether or not to execute (fixed effect) and the content of the predetermined effect (fixed effect);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D1, the first control means determines that it is a predetermined timing according to the predetermined transmission information transmitted from the second control means in accordance with the progress of the effect being executed by the second effect means. is specified, and the execution control of the effect of the first effect means is performed. difficult to occur.

In this case, when the predetermined timing is specified, the first control means uses at least information different from the information included in the transmission information to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, and whether to execute the predetermined effect. Determine at least one of the contents. As a result, the predetermined transmission information only needs to include information for making the first control means recognize that it is the predetermined timing, and includes information as to whether or not to execute the predetermined performance and information on the content of the predetermined performance. No need. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the predetermined transmission information, reduce the processing load of the second control means, and facilitate the design while making the contents of the presentation in the first presentation means appropriate. .

As described above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature D2. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
Characteristic feature D1, characterized in that the information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information includes information on the result of the privilege lottery process (information on the game result stored in the holding data area 161). game machine.

According to the feature D2, in the configuration in which the first control means determines at least one of whether or not to execute a predetermined effect in response to transmission of the transmission information from the second control means and the content of the predetermined effect, It is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature D3. The content determining means is
Correspondence determination means for determining whether execution of a privilege corresponding performance (fixed performance) as the predetermined performance corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process when the specifying means specifies that it is the predetermined timing. (a function of executing the process of step S1205 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the corresponding determination means determines that the result of the privilege lottery process corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first side setting means (sound and light side MPU 112 of step S1208) for setting the control information group corresponding to the privilege correspondence effect function to perform processing) and
Using the control information group set by the first side setting means, the first side executing means (light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object function to execute control processing) and
The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D3, since the second control means only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control means without considering the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information can be optimized. be done. Further, the first control means determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, and then controls the execution of the effect. In the case of optimizing the configuration for transmitting the transmission information of the control means, it becomes possible to control the execution of the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side.

Feature D4. The first side setting means, when the second side transmitting means transmits transmission information corresponding to performing a specific effect (determined effect) by the second effect means, sets the effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the execution corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information (in the sound and light side MPU 112, affirmative determination is made in step S1203 and step function of executing the processing of S1208).

According to feature D4, when a specific effect is performed by the second effect means, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process on the side of the first control means, Execution control of the performance corresponding to the content of the specific performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to matching of the contents of the effects between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause deviations in the effects.

Feature D5. According to any one of characteristics D1 to D4, the specifying means can specify timing corresponding to the execution of an effect different from the predetermined effect from the content of the predetermined transmission information. game machine.

According to feature D5, it is possible to consolidate information into one piece of predetermined transmission information, and to reduce the frequency of transmission of the predetermined transmission information.

Feature D6. The second control means is
When a predetermined start trigger occurs, the second effect means executes a specific range effect (effect for the game cycle, effect for the open/close execution mode) during a specific duration (during the game cycle, during the opening/closing execution mode). second-side execution means (function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122) to cause
A second control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for executing the specific range effect by the second effect means when the predetermined start opportunity is reached. side setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S802 and S806 in the display side MPU 122);
with
The specified control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specified duration period, and in correspondence with these control execution timings, is sent to the first control means The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the transmission timing of the transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to feature D6, by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing in the second control means, it is possible to perform execution control of the performance during the specific duration period, and to direct the first control means It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, the information to be referred to by the second control means is aggregated, thereby reducing the processing load.

Feature D7. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration by the second effect means can include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, ready-to-win display, etc.) with different effects modes,
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the second transmission means transmits the transmission information so that the first control means can specify the start timing of each effect range.

According to the feature D7, the second control means only needs to transmit the transmission information according to each effect range, so it is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of the transmission information. Further, in the first control means, when making the content of the effect executed by the first effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the second effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, each effect range Since it suffices to perform the adjustment in units, it becomes easier to perform the adjustment.

Feature D8. The first control means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed during the specified duration at once, but the second control means controls each timing during the specified duration. With the transmission of the transmission information as a trigger, the first side setting means (sound and light side MPU 112 and a function of setting sound output data from the set effect data group 152f).

According to the feature D8, the control information group corresponding to the entire presentation executed in the specific duration period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the side of the first control means, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specified continuation period is determined according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specified continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the performance to be executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the control information groups corresponding to the whole are set respectively on the first control means side and the second control means side. becomes possible.

Feature D9. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration by the second effect means can include a plurality of effect ranges (announcement display, ready-to-win display, etc.) with different effects modes,
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set corresponding to the plurality of rendering ranges.

According to feature D9, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature D10. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect during the specific duration when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. is a
Characteristic D8 characterized in that the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits the transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. Or the gaming machine described in D9.

According to feature D10, in the configuration for specifying that a predetermined start trigger has occurred on the first control means side, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specified duration period is set to the second control means. By adopting a configuration in which the processing is performed on the control means side, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature D11. The first side setting means, in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger, sets the transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect to the first stage. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound and light side MPU 112 function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature D10, wherein the first side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. machine.

According to the feature D11, in the configuration in which the first control means specifies that a predetermined start trigger has been reached, the first control means deliberately waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before performing the specific range presentation. Since the configuration is such that an effect corresponding to is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature D12. The first control means is
notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (function for executing the process of step S625 in the sound and light side MPU 112 )When,
Notification execution means for causing the first effect means to perform notification regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S623, S624, S1602, and S1809 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature D11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D12, when starting the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The notification is independently started by the first control means without waiting until it is done. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the first effect means can start the notification. It becomes possible.

Feature D13. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

In the configuration in which the presentation is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

In particular, when the configuration of feature D6 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire performance to be executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is likely to attract the player's attention, the influence of the occurrence of a communication abnormality is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature D14. The gaming machine according to feature D13, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker section 45) and light emitting means (light emitting section groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

The inventions of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, and the feature group D can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which effects are produced using a plurality of types of production devices.

For example, a configuration is known in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which a light emitting part such as an LED and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, the light emitting part is controlled in a lighting pattern according to the content of the sound output from the speaker. . Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced by using at least the display device and a movable object.

In a configuration in which production is performed using a plurality of types of production devices as in the above example, the processing load is distributed by using different control means for performing production execution control between a predetermined production device and a specific production device. becomes possible. In this case, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, there is a demand for a configuration that can perform good control.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. production means (groups of light emitting units 71 to 73) capable of executing production;
Information setting means (in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group (light emission data) used for executing the effect by the effect means so that it can be used when performing control of the effect of the effect means a function to execute readout processing of light emission data);
When the control execution timing comes, by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group, the execution means (the sound and light side MPU 112 in the a function to execute light emission control processing);
with
The information setting means
Original information reading means (steps S1402, S1406, S1409 and S1415 in the MPU 112 on the sound and light side) reads the original information (palette data) used for setting the control information group from the storage means (ROM 113 on the sound and light side). function to perform processing) and
Derivation means for deriving the control information group by applying setting information (start position information, duration data) to the original information read by the original information reading means (executing data expansion processing in the sound and light side MPU 112 function) and
with
The gaming machine, wherein the deriving means can derive different control information groups by applying different setting information to the original information.

According to the feature E1, different control information groups are derived by applying different setting information to the original information. This reduces the storage capacity required in the storage means as compared with a configuration in which a group of control information different for each type of performance to be executed during a predetermined period is stored in the storage means at the stage of manufacturing the game machine. becomes possible. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform the execution control of the production.

Feature E2. The derivation means is
means for applying the first setting information (start position number) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1504 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
means for applying the second setting information (duration data) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1505 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
with
The storage means stores type relation information (a data selection table) defining a correspondence relation between the original information to be used and the types of the first setting information and the types of the second setting information applied to the original information. 151g) is stored.

According to the feature E2, since the control information group is derived by applying at least the first setting information and the second setting information to the original information, the control information derived from one original information It becomes possible to diversify the group. In this case, type relation information defining correspondence between the original information to be used and the type of the first setting information and the type of the second setting information applied to the original information is stored in advance in the storage means. Because of the configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for specifying the correspondence relationship between the original information and each piece of setting information.

Feature E3. A plurality of pieces of the original information are stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein a plurality of the setting information are applicable to one piece of the original information.

According to feature E3, it is possible to diversify the control information group while suppressing the required storage capacity of the storage means.

Feature E4. A characteristic characterized in that the storage means stores correspondence relationship information (start position data group 151b) defining a correspondence relationship between the original information to be used and the setting information to be applied to the original information. A gaming machine described in E3.

Characteristic E4 simplifies the process for identifying the correspondence between the original information and the setting information.

Feature E5. The original information defines the content of the switching destination when the content of the presentation in the presentation means is sequentially switched,
The derivation means, as the setting information, a start reference indicating from which content of the switching destination out of a plurality of contents of the switching destination defined in the original information, the rendering in the rendering means is to be started. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized by comprising means for applying information (starting position number) (function for executing the processing of step S1504 in the sound and light side MPU 112).

According to the feature E5, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of varying the starting reference information, and diversification of the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity is achieved. It is possible to achieve this while facilitating the design.

Feature E6. The original information defines the content of the switching destination when the content of the presentation in the presentation means is sequentially switched,
The derivation means applies, as the setting information, continuation reference information (duration time data) indicating a continuation period for continuing each content of the switching destination defined in the original information (duration data) (sound and light side A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112 .

According to the feature E6, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of varying the continuation reference information, thereby diversifying the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. It is possible to achieve this while facilitating the design.

Feature E7. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The deriving means uses the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means, and at least the first unit effect means and the second unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means have different setting information. A feature characterized by having a first derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for deriving different control information groups by applying information. The game machine according to any one of E1 to E6.

According to feature E7, it is possible to derive different groups of control information in a plurality of unit effect means while using the same original information. As a result, since the same original information can be used even when different effects are executed among a plurality of unit effect means, it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E8. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The derivation means is
A first derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that uses the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means;
A second derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1510 to S1518 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that uses the different original information for a part of the unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E8, it is possible to switch between a simple presentation mode and a complicated presentation mode simply by changing the number of pieces of original information used for a plurality of unit presentation means.

Feature E9. The second derivation means applies, as the setting information, application target information (list data, group data) indicating the type of the original information to be applied to each of the plurality of unit effect means (sound and light side MPU 112 A gaming machine according to feature E8, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S1511 and S1512 in .

According to the feature E9, when different original information is applied among a plurality of unit rendering means, it is only necessary to refer to the application target information, so that the application process can be simplified.

Feature E10. The directing means is light emitting means,
The control information group is for determining the light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the original information defines the switching destination content when the light emitting content of the light emitting means is sequentially switched.

According to the feature E10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

In addition, the invention of the characteristic group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, a control device having a CPU and ROM, or having a CPU, ROM, etc. integrated into one chip is provided. ), and a configuration in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker.

The control device reads data that determines the content of the performance, and controls execution of the performance by executing processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, the control device reads out data corresponding to the contents of the effect to be executed, and uses the read data to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. , a configuration for controlling the display effect is conceivable. In addition, in light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed is read in the control device, and the read data is used to cause the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined pattern, thereby performing the light emitting effect. A control configuration is conceivable. In addition, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and the read data is used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker. A control configuration is conceivable.

Here, it is preferable that the number of types of effects executed by a predetermined effect device is large, and there is room for improvement in the control method for increasing the types of effects.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Output means (speaker unit 45, light emitting unit group 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification,
Information setting means (in the sound and light side MPU 112) that sets the control information group (sound output data, light emission data) used for operating the output means so that it can be used when performing output control of the output means a function of executing sound output data readout processing, a function of executing light emission data readout processing in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the control execution timing comes, the execution means for operating the output means by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group (the function of executing the sound output control process in the sound and light side MPU 112 , a function of executing light emission control processing in the sound and light side MPU 112);
with
A plurality of storage areas (first sound output area 171 to 16th sound output area 186, base area 162a, interrupt area 162b and notification area 162c) in which the control information group can be set,
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas, the execution means operates the output means by using a part of the control information group among the control information groups. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature F1, in a situation in which one control information group is used to control the output of the output means, it is necessary to use another control information group to control the output of the output means. Also, the other control information group can be stored separately from the one control information group. As a result, it is possible to cause the one output means to perform various operations according to the situation. Furthermore, when switching from one operation to the next operation, it is possible to leave the control information group corresponding to the former operation, thereby reducing the processing load when returning to the former operation. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature F2. The control information group includes designation information (pointer information) that enables identification of information corresponding to each control execution timing,
The execution means reads out information corresponding to the designation information from the control information group and uses it to operate the output means in a manner corresponding to the control information group,
With regard to the designation information of the control information group not to be used by the executing means among the control information groups stored in the plurality of storage areas, the designation information of the control information group to be used Characteristic feature F1 characterized by comprising updating means (function for executing the process of step S1610 in the sound and light side MPU 112 and function for executing the process of step S1814 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for updating when updating is performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature F2, when the use of the previously used control information group is stopped and the use of another control information group is started, the use of the other control information group is terminated and the previously used control information group is used. When returning to the state of using the previously used control information group, at the return timing, the output means performs the same operation as when the previously used control information group is continuously used. As a result, even if another control information group is interrupted and used, it is possible to cause the output means to perform an operation according to the elapsed time.

In particular, in a configuration in which the operation of the output means is performed in association with other output means, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the operation of the other output means.

Feature F3. The control information group stored in the plurality of storage areas has a priority for use by the output means,
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the execution means uses the control information group with the higher priority as a target of use when using a part of the control information group. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by:

According to feature F3, in a configuration in which a plurality of control information groups are stored simultaneously, a control information group with a high priority is used, so that the operation of the output means can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the control information group to be used by comparing the priorities. Therefore, the processing for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the plurality of storage areas are provided corresponding to the priority.

According to feature F4, since the priority is set for each storage area, there is no need to compare the priority for each control information group when selecting the control information group to be used. Therefore, the processing for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F5. The execution means
a notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that executes notification by the output means when the control information group for notification is to be used;
Effect executing means (function for executing the processing of steps S1604 and S1605 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing the effect by the output means when the control information group for effect is to be used. When,
with
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the control information group for notification has a higher priority than the control information group for effect.

According to the feature F5, the execution of notification can be prioritized over the execution of performance, and when the execution of notification is prioritized, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the processing.

Feature F6. The execution means
a bass execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform a bass operation when the control information group for bass is to be used;
an interrupt executing means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform an interrupt operation when the control information group for interrupt is to be used;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the control information group for interrupt has a higher priority than the control information group for base.

According to the feature F6, the interrupt operation can be executed with priority over the base operation, thereby facilitating the design of the operation of the output means. In addition, when priority is given to the interrupt operation, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the processing.

Feature F7. At least a specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) among the plurality of storage areas is configured such that an instruction to store a new control information group can occur in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area. can be,
In the control information group stored in the specific storage area, a storage priority (light emitting side priority) for storing in the specific storage area is defined,
When a new control information group is instructed to be stored while the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is higher than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the state in which the already stored control information group is stored is maintained without executing the storage processing of the new control information group, and the new control information group is the above. If the storage priority is higher than the already stored control information group, writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (executing the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound and light side MPU 112 The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that it has a function of

According to feature F7, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priority. planned.

Feature F8. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
The execution means
confirmation executing means for causing the output means to execute a performance for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the control information group for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is to be used;
expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute a performance for expecting the privilege occurrence when the control information group for expecting the privilege occurrence is to be used;
with
The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the control information group for confirmation of privilege occurrence has a higher storage priority than the control information group for expecting privilege occurrence.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege. Also, when giving priority to the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priority.

Feature F9. The directing means is light emitting means,
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the control information group is for determining the light emission pattern of the light emission means during the predetermined period.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Output means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification,
Information setting means for storing a group of control information (light emission data) used for operating the output means in a specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) so that it can be used when performing output control of the output means. (a function of executing light emission data reading processing in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the control execution timing comes, execution means (sound and light side MPU 112 a function to execute light emission control processing in
with
In the control information group stored in the specific storage area, a storage priority (light emitting side priority) for storing in the specific storage area is defined,
When a new control information group is instructed to be stored while the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is higher than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the state in which the already stored control information group is stored is maintained without executing the storage processing of the new control information group, and the new control information group is the above. If the storage priority is higher than the already stored control information group, writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (executing the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound and light side MPU 112 A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the feature G1, when it becomes necessary to control the output of the output means using another control information group in a situation where one control information group is used to control the output of the output means, the other control information group is used. can be switched to output control using the control information group. As a result, it becomes possible to perform various operations according to the situation in one output means.

In addition, in a configuration in which a new control information group can be overwritten even in a situation where a control information group is already stored in a specific storage area, a state in which a control information group with a high storage priority is stored in the specific storage area. Therefore, the operation of the output means can be made appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities. Therefore, the processing for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature G2. A privilege lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player,
The execution means
confirmation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the group of control information for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is to be used;
an expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for expecting the privilege occurrence when the group of control information for expecting the privilege occurrence is to be used;
with
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the control information group for determining the privilege occurrence has a higher storage priority than the control information group for expecting the privilege occurrence.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege. Also, when giving priority to the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priority.

Feature G3. The directing means is light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the control information group is for determining the light emission pattern of the light emission means during the predetermined period.

According to the feature G3, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described with respect to the light emission control of the light emitting means.

It should be noted that the inventions of the group of characteristics F and the group of characteristics G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, a control device having a CPU and ROM, or having a CPU, ROM, etc. integrated into one chip is provided. ), and a configuration in which an output device such as a speaker is controlled to perform an effect or a notification is known.

The control device reads out data that determines the content of the effects and notifications, and controls execution of the effects and notifications by executing processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, the control device reads out data corresponding to the contents of the effects and notifications to be executed, and uses the read data to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. By doing so, a configuration for controlling the execution of the display effect and the notification display is conceivable. In addition, in the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and the read data is used to cause the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined pattern. A configuration for controlling execution of effects and notification light emission is conceivable. In addition, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and the read data is used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker. A configuration is conceivable that controls execution of effects and notification sound output.

Here, there is a demand for a suitable control method for the execution of effects and notifications.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of driving means (drawers 56a and 56b for the curtain plate) used for driving the movable effect means (the movable object 52);
a plurality of position detection means (adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b) provided corresponding to each drive means and used for detecting that the driven object of each drive means is arranged at a corresponding predetermined position;
At least one condition is that each of the position detecting means detects that the driven object of each of the driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position, and the predetermined operation (third motion) to which the driven object corresponds (third a drive control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2003, S2005, S2007, S2009 and S2010 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for driving and controlling the respective driving means so as to perform stepwise operation or return operation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, the timing for causing each driven target to perform a predetermined action is not specified by measuring the time, but the predetermined action is performed after it is detected that each driven target is placed at a predetermined position. Because of this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the motions of the driven objects when performing the predetermined motions. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform execution control of the performance using the movable object.

Feature H2. The drive control means is
a first drive control means (a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that drives and controls each of the drive means so that each of the drive targets performs a specific operation corresponding to each;
at least one of detecting that each of the driven objects is placed at the corresponding predetermined position by the plurality of position detecting means after the corresponding specific motion is performed on each of the driven objects; As conditions, a second drive control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2009 and S2010 in the sound and light side MPU 112) that drives and controls each of the drive means so that each of the driven objects performs the corresponding predetermined operation;
The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature H2, when a predetermined action is performed after a specific action is performed in each drive target, it is possible to synchronize the start timings of the predetermined action.

Feature H3. The drive control means performs intermediate drive control for drive-controlling the drive means so that the drive targets are arranged at the corresponding predetermined positions after the corresponding specific actions are performed in the drive targets. The game machine according to feature H2, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step S2007 in the sound and light side MPU 112).

According to feature H3, even after the specific action, it is possible to synchronize and start the predetermined action in each drive target after each drive target is placed at a predetermined position.

Feature H4. Each of the driven objects is configured to operate by being displaced from the initial position to the production position side when the production is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the predetermined position exists on the initial position side of the position when the specific action is being performed.

According to the feature H4, in order to synchronize and start a predetermined operation in each driven object, in a configuration in which a predetermined operation is started after each driven object is placed at a predetermined position, a configuration for arranging each driven object at a predetermined position is provided. It is possible to make the player recognize that the action is a return action to the initial position. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the action of arranging the object at the predetermined position without any sense of discomfort, and it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness when the predetermined action is performed.

Feature H5. The drive control means includes a return control means ( A gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S2010 in the sound and light side MPU 112 .

According to the characteristic H5, even if the target is returned to the initial position without performing the predetermined action after the specific action, the return to the initial position is started after each driven object is placed at the predetermined position. It is possible to synchronize the returning operation to the position in each driven object. In addition, the player pays attention to whether the movement to return to the initial position is performed after being placed at the predetermined position, or whether the predetermined movement is generated, and the degree of attention of the player to the movable effect means is increased. becomes possible.

Feature H6. Each of the driven objects is configured to operate by being displaced from the initial position to the production position side when the production is executed,
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the predetermined position exists on the performance position side of the initial position.

According to the feature H6, when each driven object is arranged at a predetermined position so as to synchronize and start a predetermined operation, it is not necessary to return to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement for arranging at a predetermined position.

Feature H7. Under at least one condition that each of the position detecting means detects that the drive target of each of the driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position, an effect corresponding to the predetermined action is performed by the effect executing means (symbol). Display device 31, speaker unit 45, various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) effect control means (function for executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in sound and light side MPU 112, display side MPU 122) The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H7, it is possible to perform a corresponding effect in the effect means in synchronization with the start of the predetermined action.

Feature H8. A configuration in which an effect by the movable effect means can be performed in the middle of the first effect range,
The production control means is
means for controlling the effect executing means (function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122) so that the content of the effect changes with the passage of time in the first effect range;
In the first effect range, after each of the position detection means detects that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position, the effect corresponding to the predetermined action is performed. A means for controlling the effect execution means so as to be performed (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3401 in the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3402);
The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H8, while the execution control of the effect in the effect execution means is basically performed according to the elapsed time, the effect corresponding to the predetermined action can be easily synchronized with the operation of the movable effect means.

Feature H9. The effect control means waits in the first effect range until at least each of the position detection means detects that the driving target of each driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. A feature H8 characterized by comprising a means for controlling the effect execution means so that the effect of The game machine described.

According to the feature H9, even during the period in which the movable effect means is waiting until the predetermined action is started, the effect for waiting is performed by the effect execution means, so the player feels uncomfortable with the effect in the effect execution means. becomes difficult.

Feature H10. A first effect execution control means (sound and light side MPU 112) having the drive control means;
A second effect execution control means (display side MPU 122) having the effect control means;
with
The first effect execution control means starts drive control of each drive means when the second effect execution control means transmits transmission information corresponding to the start of drive control,
Said effect control means has at least one condition that each of said position detection means has detected that the drive target of each of said drive means has been placed at said corresponding predetermined position, and said first control means corresponds to it. The game machine according to any one of features H7 to H9, wherein the effect executing means is controlled so that an effect corresponding to the predetermined action is performed when the transmitted information is transmitted.

According to the feature H10, while making it possible to execute an effect in the movable effect means according to the progress of the effect in the effect execution means, when a predetermined action is performed in the movable effect means, the effect in the effect execution means is synchronized with it. It is possible to

Feature H11. The effect execution means is display means having a display unit,
The game according to any one of features H7 to H10, wherein the movable presentation means has an operating range including a range facing the display section from the direction in which the display section faces. machine.

According to the characteristic H11, in the configuration in which the movable effect means performs a predetermined action in association with the display effect on the display section, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature H12. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the movable effect means is a movable object that operates integrally, and each of the driven objects is connected to the movable object.

According to the feature H12, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the movable object that operates integrally.

In addition, the invention of the above characteristic group H can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, there are known those provided with movable objects that are driven by driving devices such as solenoids and rotary motors.

For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the winning result is obtained by lottery. In such a case, a configuration is known in which a combination of specific symbols, etc. is displayed in a final stop on the display surface, and a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. In this case, for example, when the movable object moves in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the transition to the special game state occurs with a relatively high probability. I am trying to increase the interest of the game.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables suitable execution control of performances using movable objects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A first effect execution control means (sound and light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect execution means (curtain board movable object 52);
Second effect execution control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling second effect execution means (symbol display device 31);
with
The first effect execution control means corresponds information setting means (sound a function of executing the process of step S3309 in the light-side MPU 112),
The second effect execution control means controls the effect contents of the second effect execution means to become specific effect contents when the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature I1, when the performance content of the first performance execution means becomes the predetermined performance content or when it becomes the predetermined performance content, the information corresponding to it is set, and the second performance execution means is set accordingly. is the specific production content. This makes it easier to synchronize the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the specific effect content in the second effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect executing means.

Feature I2. The effect content of the first effect execution means can become a predetermined effect content in the middle of the first effect range,
The second production execution control means is
means for controlling the second effect execution means (function for executing task processing in the display side MPU 122) so that the content of the effect changes with the passage of time in the first effect range;
In the first effect range, after the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means, means for controlling the second effect execution means (step in the display side MPU 122) so as to achieve the specific effect content A function of making an affirmative determination in S3401 and executing the processing of step S3402);
The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I2, while the execution control of the effect in the second effect execution means is basically performed according to the elapsed time, the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the specific effect in the second effect execution means It becomes easy to synchronize with the content.

Feature I3. The second effect execution control means controls the second effect execution means so that the waiting effect is performed in the first effect range at least until the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized by comprising control means (a function of making a negative determination in step S3401 in the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3403).

According to feature I3, even during the waiting period until information is set by the corresponding information setting means, the waiting effect is performed by the second effect executing means. It becomes difficult for people to feel uncomfortable.

Feature I4. The first effect execution control means, when the second effect execution control means transmits transmission information corresponding to starting execution control of the effect of the first effect execution means, responds to the transmission information. Execution control of the production in the first production execution means is started so that the production according to the mode is performed,
The second effect execution control means is configured such that the corresponding information setting means has transmitted transmission information corresponding to a case where the effect content of the first effect execution means becomes a predetermined effect content or a case where the effect content becomes the predetermined effect content. The game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I3, wherein the performance content of the second performance execution means is set to a specific performance content when the second performance executing means is selected.

According to the feature I4, while enabling execution of the effect in the first effect execution means in accordance with the progress content of the effect in the second effect execution means, predetermined effect contents in the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means It becomes easy to synchronize with the specific performance content in.

Feature I5. The first production execution means is movable production means,
The corresponding information setting means sets the corresponding information when the position detection means (adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b) detects that the movable effect means has reached a predetermined position. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, when the position detection means detects that the movable effect means has reached the predetermined position, the effect content of the second effect execution means is set to the specific effect content, so that the movable effect means is operated. Even if there is a deviation, the performance contents of the second performance execution means can be set to the specific performance contents in synchronization with the execution of the predetermined action in the movable performance means.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are different types of effect execution means.

According to the characteristic I6, in the configuration in which the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are different types of effect executing means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature I7. The second effect execution means is display means having a display unit,
Any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the first effect executing means is a movable effect means whose operating range includes a range facing the display unit from the direction in which the display unit faces. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature I7, in the configuration in which the movable effect means performs a predetermined action in association with the display effect on the display section, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

It should be noted that the invention of characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which effects are produced using a plurality of types of production devices.

For example, a configuration is known in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which a light emitting part such as an LED and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, the light emitting part is controlled in a lighting pattern according to the content of the sound output from the speaker. . Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced by using at least the display device and a movable object.

There is a demand for a configuration that can perform good control in a configuration that uses a plurality of types of presentation devices to produce effects, such as the above example.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Effect execution means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be in a predetermined action state at least once for one execution of the action,
Start control means for executing the start control of the effect execution means so as to start the operation (function for executing the processing of steps S2603, S2704 and S2705 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the effect execution means is operating;
When the stop information is set, the stop control means (step S2615 in the sound and light side MPU 112 in the first embodiment) for stopping the operation of the effect execution means after the effect execution means is in the predetermined operating state. , a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 and S3010, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3208, S3217 and S3220 in the sound and light side MPU 112 in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, since the effect executing means is stopped after reaching a predetermined operating state, it is possible to unify the mode when the effect executing means is stopped. In addition, the control mode when operating the effect execution means is standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when a predetermined operation state is reached after the stop information setting control. Therefore, the processing can be simplified when diversifying the operation period of the effect executing means. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform the execution control of the production.

Feature J2. As the timing at which the stop information is set by the stop information setting means, there are a plurality of timings such that the elapsed time after the start control is executed by the start control means is different,
The plurality of types of timing include a timing at which the stop information is set when the effect executing means operates a specific number of times, and a timing at which the stop information is set when the number of times of operation of the effect executing means is different from the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that the timing to be set is included.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to diversify the number of operations of the performance executing means while enabling the operation to be stopped after a predetermined operation state is reached, simply by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

Feature J3. The effect executing means is movable effect means capable of simultaneously executing a first action (rotating action) and a second action (sliding action) different from the first action,
The operation in which the operation cycle occurs is configured to be performed as the first operation,
Depending on the setting timing of the stop information, the first action may be stopped before the second action, or the first action may be stopped after the second action. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized by:

According to the feature J3, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the effect executing means simply by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

Feature J4. The stop information setting means is characterized in that it sets the stop information according to the progress of the production in another production execution means (symbol display device 31) different from the production execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of J3.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to perform the effect in the effect executing means so as to correlate with the progress of the effect in the separate effect means, and to increase the degree of attention to the effect. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature J1, even if the operation of the effect executing means is stopped according to the progress of the effect of the different effect executing means, the effect executing means can perform the predetermined operation. Since the operation is stopped after the state is reached, it is possible to unify the mode when the effect executing means is stopped.

Feature J5. The production execution means is movable production means,
According to any one of characteristics J1 to J4, the predetermined operating state is an operating state in which the movable effect means is detected by predetermined detecting means (rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b). game machine.

According to feature J5, since the movable effect means stops its operation after being detected by the predetermined detecting means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means when not in operation, and the movable effect can be achieved. It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of the operation of the means.

Feature J6. The stop control means is
an operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2708, S2709, S2713, S2714, S2906 and S2907 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, if the grasped result of the operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the movement of the movable effect means is not performed. Limiting means (a function for executing the process of step S2802 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting a limit state that is not stopped;
The gaming machine according to feature J5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J6, when the stop information is set when the grasping result of the operating position grasping means is the predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the movable effect means is detected. is not stopped. Thus, when stopping the movable effect means is inconvenient, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means and to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing.

Feature J7. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a, 67b) that drives the movable effect means is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by using the number of steps of the stepping motor.

According to the feature J7, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means is achieved.

Feature J8. The predetermined grasping result of the operating position grasping means is that the operating position of the movable effect means exists within a limited range including a range that is a part of all the operating positions and that is detected by the predetermined detecting means. The game machine according to feature J6 or J7, wherein the comprehension result corresponds to the fact that the player is playing.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is detected. If you try to stop it, the stop mode of the movable effect means may become unfavorable. On the other hand, according to feature J8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stoppage of the movable effect means is restricted. It becomes possible to

Feature J9. When the stop control means is in the restricted state, the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the restricted range when the stop information is set. The game machine according to feature J8, further comprising a restriction release means (a function of executing the processing of step S2910 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for releasing the restriction state by.

According to feature J9, even if the movable effect means is limited to being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means is not extended longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature J10. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a, 67b) that drives the movable effect means is provided,
The operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by using the number of steps of the stepping motor,
When the number of steps grasped by the operating position grasping means reaches the number of steps for canceling the limit (the number of steps for determining whether to cancel the stoppage) after exceeding the limit range, the limit canceling means The gaming machine according to feature J9, characterized in that it cancels the state.

According to the feature J10, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable effect means are simplified.

Feature J11. The stop control means is
detection result confirmation means for executing detection result confirmation processing for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means (function for executing the processes of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
History storage execution means (sound and light side MPU 112 a function to execute the processes of steps S3101 and S3103 in
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, the stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 112, step a function to execute the processing of S3217 and step S3220);
The gaming machine according to any one of J5 to J10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J11, the stop control of the movable effect means is executed according to the contents of the history information stored in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. It is possible to perform the stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for execution of confirmation processing for the detection result of the detection means.

Feature J12. The stop control means includes a stop information confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing stop information confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop information is set,
The gaming machine according to feature J11, wherein the detection result confirmation means executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

According to feature J12, it is difficult for a time lag to occur between the history information in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection means at that time, and the history information in the history storage means is stored. In the configuration that refers to and stops the movable effect means, it becomes easier to perform stop control in line with the operating position of the movable effect means.

Feature J13. The history storage means comprises a plurality of storage areas capable of storing confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means,
The stopping means stores a predetermined plurality or more of detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means by the predetermined detecting means in the plurality of storage areas in succession. The gaming machine according to feature J11 or J12, wherein the stored history information is determined to be information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. .

According to the feature J13, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection means, it is possible to accurately perform stop control of the movable effect means.

Feature J14. The movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and a second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b),
The predetermined detection means is provided to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position, and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position,
When the stop information is set, the stop control means causes at least the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means to stop synchronously at corresponding predetermined initial positions. (In the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2718 in the sound and light side MPU 112, in the second embodiment, a function for executing sensor monitoring processing in the sound and light side MPU 112) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features J5 to J13, characterized by:

According to the feature J14, in a configuration having a plurality of movable effect means, it is possible to synchronize and stop these movable effect means, and to interrelate the operations of the plurality of movable effect means.

Feature J15. The means for stopping synchronization,
a first operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the first movable effect means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2708, S2713 and S2906 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
a second operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the second movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2709, S2714 and S2907 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, at least the grasped result of the first motion position grasping means or the second motion position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first motion position grasping means and the second motion position grasping means When the grasping results of both of the two motion position grasping means are predetermined grasping results, even if the first movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the first movable effect means is not stopped. In this case, even if the second movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, the operation of the second movable effect means is not stopped. function to perform processing) and
The gaming machine according to feature J14, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J15, when the grasping result of any of the action position grasping means or each action position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means in a situation where the stop information is set. is detected, each movable effect means is not stopped. As a result, when the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where it is not possible to synchronize and stop each movable effect means. As a result, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

Feature J16. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) that drives the first movable effect means, and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) that drives the second movable effect means,
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The gaming machine according to feature J15, wherein the second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by using the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

According to the feature J16, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means is achieved.

Feature J17. The predetermined grasping result of the first operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the first movable effect means is a partial range of all the operating positions and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. It is a comprehension result corresponding to existing in the first limit range,
The predetermined grasping result of the second operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the second movable effect means is a partial range of all the operating positions and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature J15 or J16, wherein the comprehension result corresponds to being within the second restricted range.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is detected. If you try to stop it, the stop mode in the state where each movable effect means is synchronized may become unfavorable. On the other hand, according to the characteristic J17, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is restricted. Become.

Feature J18. In the limited state, the synchronous stop means is configured so that at least both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means exceed the limit range when the stop information is set. Characteristic J17, characterized in that it comprises a restriction releasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for releasing the restricted state until the next detection by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic J18, even if the stopping of each movable effect means is limited, it is within the range of one operation, so the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature J19. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) that drives the first movable effect means, and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) that drives the second movable effect means,
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by using the number of steps of the second stepping motor,
When the number of steps grasped by at least the first action position grasping means and the second action position grasping means becomes a limit canceling step number after exceeding the limit range The gaming machine according to feature J18, wherein the restricted state is released.

According to the feature J19, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means and the processing configuration for canceling the restriction on the stop of each movable effect means are simplified.

Feature J20. The means for stopping synchronization,
a first detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3102 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing a first detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means;
a second detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means;
Execution of first history storage for storing the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means in the first history storage means (the areas 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing of the first confirmation process. means (a function of executing the processing of step S3101 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Execution of second history storage for storing the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means in the second history storage means (the areas 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing of the second confirmation process. means (a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Stop means for controlling the stop of each movable effect means according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S3208, S3217 and S3220 in the sound and light side MPU 112) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J14 to J19, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J20, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. , it is possible to execute the stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for the execution of confirmation processing for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. Thereby, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect|presentation means in the synchronized state.

Feature J21. In the stopping means, both the history information stored in the first history storage means and the history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to the stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. The gaming machine according to feature J20, characterized in that both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped when .

According to the feature J21, when both of the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop the movable effect means in a synchronized state.

It should be noted that the invention of the characteristic group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, there is known a configuration in which effects are produced using a production device.

For example, a configuration is known in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device performs a display effect. Also, there is known a configuration in which a light-emitting portion such as an LED produces light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced by causing a movable object to perform a predetermined action.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the performance to be appropriately controlled, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Movable effect means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (initial rotation position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the action;
a start control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing the start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation;
stop information setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
When the stop information is set, stop control means (steps S3208, S3217 and S3220 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. function to execute the processing of
with
The stop control means is
detection result confirmation means for executing detection result confirmation processing for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means (function for executing the processes of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
History storage execution means (step in sound and light side MPU 112) for storing the confirmation result of the detection result confirmation means in history storage means (areas 164a to 164f of movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing of the confirmation process a function to execute the processing of S3101 and step S3103;
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, the stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 112, step a function to execute the processing of S3217 and step S3220);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K1, the movable effect means stops its operation after being detected by the predetermined detection means. It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of the operation of the means. In addition, the control mode when the movable effect means is operated is standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when detected by a predetermined detecting means after the stop information setting control. Therefore, the processing can be simplified when diversifying the operation period of the movable effect means. Furthermore, at the timing when the stop information is set, the stop control of the movable effect means is executed according to the contents of the history information stored in the history storage means. It becomes possible to perform the stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the presentation using the movable presentation means.

Feature K2. The stop control means includes a stop information confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing stop information confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop information is set,
The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the detection result confirmation means executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

According to feature K2, it is difficult for a time lag to occur between the history information in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection means at that time, and the history information in the history storage means is stored. In the configuration that refers to and stops the movable effect means, it becomes easier to perform stop control in line with the operating position of the movable effect means.

Feature K3. The history storage means comprises a plurality of storage areas capable of storing confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means,
The stopping means stores a predetermined plurality or more of detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means by the predetermined detecting means in the plurality of storage areas in succession. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the stored history information is determined to be information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. .

According to the feature K3, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection means, it is possible to accurately perform stop control of the movable effect means.

Feature K4. The movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and a second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b),
The predetermined detection means is provided to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position, and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position,
The detection result confirmation means is
a first detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3102 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing a first detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means;
a second detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means;
with
The history storage execution means is
Execution of first history storage for storing the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means in the first history storage means (the areas 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing of the first confirmation process. means (a function of executing the processing of step S3101 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
Execution of second history storage for storing the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means in the second history storage means (the areas 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing of the second confirmation process. means (a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
with
According to any one of the characteristics K1 to K3, the stopping means performs stop control of each movable effect means according to the content of history information stored in each history storage means. game machine.

According to the characteristic K4, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. , it is possible to execute the stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for the execution of confirmation processing for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. Thereby, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect|presentation means in the synchronized state.

Feature K5. In the stopping means, both the history information stored in the first history storage means and the history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to the stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped when .

According to the feature K5, when both of the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop the movable effect means in a synchronized state.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Movable effect means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (initial rotation position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the action;
start control means for executing start control of the movable effect means so as to start operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2603, S2704 and S2705 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
stop information setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
When the stop information is set, the stop control means (steps S2615, S3005 and S3010 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. function to execute the processing of
with
The stop control means is
an operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2708, S2709, S2713, S2714, S2906 and S2907 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, if the grasped result of the operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the movement of the movable effect means is not performed. Limiting means (a function for executing the process of step S2802 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting a limit state that is not stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, since the movable effect means stops its operation after being detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means when not in operation, and the movable effect can be achieved. It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of the operation of the means. In this case, if the grasping result of the action position grasping means is the predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means in a situation where the stop information is set, the movable effect means is not stopped. Thus, when stopping the movable effect means is inconvenient, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means and to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the presentation using the movable presentation means.

Feature L2. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a, 67b) that drives the movable effect means is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by using the number of steps of the stepping motor.

According to feature L2, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means is achieved.

Feature L3. The predetermined grasping result of the operating position grasping means is that the operating position of the movable effect means exists within a limited range including a range that is a part of all the operating positions and that is detected by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L1, wherein the comprehension result corresponds to that the player is playing.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is detected. If you try to stop it, the stop mode of the movable effect means may become unfavorable. On the other hand, according to feature L3, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stoppage of the movable effect means is restricted. It becomes possible to

Feature L4. When the stop control means is in the restricted state, the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the restricted range when the stop information is set. The game machine according to feature L3, characterized by comprising a restriction releasing means (a function of executing the processing of step S2910 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for releasing the restriction state by.

According to feature L4, even if the movable effect means is limited to being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means is not extended longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature L5. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a, 67b) that drives the movable effect means is provided,
The operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by using the number of steps of the stepping motor,
The limit canceling means cancels the restricted state when the number of steps grasped by the operating position grasping means reaches a limit canceling step number after exceeding the limit range. The game machine according to the characterizing feature L4.

According to feature L5, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ascertaining the operating position of the movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable effect means.

Feature L6. A first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) capable of performing a movable effect,
A second movable effect means (disk movable object 62b on the right side) capable of performing a movable effect,
Start control means (step S2704 and step a function to execute the processing of S2705);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where each movable effect means is operating;
a stop control means (a function of executing steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means after the stop information is set;
with
The stop control means is
a first operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the first movable effect means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2708, S2713 and S2906 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
a second operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the second movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2709, S2714 and S2907 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, at least the grasped result of the first motion position grasping means or the second motion position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first motion position grasping means and the second motion position grasping means When the results of grasping by both of the two motion position grasping means are predetermined grasping results, both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount. means (a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature L6, in a configuration having a plurality of movable effect means, it is possible to synchronize and stop these movable effect means, and it is possible to synchronize the operations of the plurality of movable effect means. Further, when the grasping result of any of the action position grasping means or each action position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means is displaced by a predetermined amount even in a situation where the stop information is set. is stopped after As a result, when the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where it is not possible to synchronize and stop each movable effect means. As a result, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the presentation using the movable presentation means.

Feature L7. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) that drives the first movable effect means, and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) that drives the second movable effect means,
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The gaming machine according to feature L6, wherein the second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by using the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

According to feature L7, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means is achieved.

Feature L8. The predetermined grasping result of the first operating position grasping means is the operating position of the first movable effect means, which is a partial range of all the operating positions and includes a range detected by the predetermined detecting means. 1 is a comprehension result corresponding to existing within the limit range,
The predetermined grasping result of the second motion position grasping means includes a range in which the motion position of the second movable effect means is a partial range of all the motion positions and includes a range detected by the predetermined detecting means. 2. The gaming machine according to feature L6 or L7, wherein the comprehension result corresponds to existence within the limit range.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is detected. If you try to stop it, the stop mode in the state where each movable effect means is synchronized may become unfavorable. On the other hand, according to feature L8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is restricted. Become.

Feature L9. When the limiting state is reached, the limiting means has at least both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means after exceeding the limit range when the stop information is set. A game machine according to feature L8, characterized in that the game machine is stopped when it is detected by the predetermined detection means next time.

According to feature L9, even if the stopping of each movable effect means is limited, it is within the range of one operation, so the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature L10. Movable effect means (disc movable objects 62a, 62b) capable of performing a movable effect,
a start control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for executing the start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation;
stop information setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound and light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
after the stop information is set, stop control means for stopping the operation of the movable effect means (function for executing the processing of steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
with
The stop control means is
an operating position grasping means for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2708, S2709, S2713, S2714, S2906 and S2907 in the sound and light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, if the grasped result of the operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, the movable effect means is displaced by a predetermined amount, and then the limiting means (sound and light) is stopped. a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the side MPU 112;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L10, when the result of grasping by the motion position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, the movable effect means is stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount even in a situation where stop information is set. be. Thus, when stopping the movable effect means is inconvenient, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means and to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the presentation using the movable presentation means.

It should be noted that the inventions of the characteristic group K and the characteristic group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these game machines, there are known those provided with movable objects that are driven by driving devices such as solenoids and rotary motors.

For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the winning result is obtained by lottery. In such a case, a configuration is known in which a combination of specific symbols is displayed in a final stop on the display surface, and a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. In this case, for example, when the movable object moves in a situation where the pattern is being displayed, the transition to the special game state occurs with a relatively high probability. I am trying to increase the interest of the game.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables suitable execution control of performances using movable objects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a certain period of time or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 31... Pattern display apparatus 45... Speaker part 51... Movable curtain board unit 52... Movable curtain board unit 53a, 53b. , 55b... slide member 56a, 56b... drive unit for curtain plate 57a, 57b... curtain plate initial position sensor 58a, 58b... adjustment position sensor 61a, 61b... disk movable unit 62a, 62b... disk movable object, 63a, 63b... disk drive unit 64a, 64b... disk rail 65a, 65b... guide member with shaft 66a, 66b... disk slide drive part 67a, 67b... disk rotation drive part 68a, 68b... Slide initial position sensor 69a, 69b Rotation initial position sensor 71 to 73 Light emitting unit group 111 Sound emission control board 112 Sound and light side MPU 113 Sound and light side ROM 114 Sound and light side RAM 121... Display control board, 122... Display side MPU, 123... Display side ROM, 124... Display side RAM, 164... Movable object data area.

Claims (1)

a light emitting means capable of executing a performance using light;
information setting means for setting light emission pattern information used for executing an effect in the light emitting means so that it can be used when performing execution control of the effect of the light emitting means;
an execution means for causing the light emitting means to perform an effect during a predetermined period by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the light emission pattern information when the control execution timing comes;
a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of original information used for setting the light emission pattern information;
The information setting means
original information reading means for reading out predetermined original information from the storage means;
derivation means for deriving the light emission pattern information by applying setting information to the predetermined original information read by the original information reading means;
with
The predetermined original information includes:
execution order information corresponding to the execution order of the effects in the light emitting means;
correspondence information set in correspondence with the execution order information and used by the execution means for controlling the execution of the performance of the light emission means;
is set and
a plurality of pieces of specific information including first information and second information are set in a predetermined order in the execution order information;
At the next control execution timing with respect to the control execution timing at which the light emitting means executes an effect using the correspondence information corresponding to the specific information set in the last order, the execution means , wherein the corresponding information corresponding to the specific information set in the first order is used to execute an effect by the light emitting means,
The derivation means is
By applying the first setting information as the setting information, the effect in the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the predetermined original information in correspondence with the first information. means for deriving the light emission pattern information to be different;
By applying the second setting information as the setting information, the effect in the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the correspondence information set in the predetermined original information in association with the second information. means for deriving the light emission pattern information to be different;
with
The information used for controlling the light emitting means includes information that is to be used with priority over the light emission pattern information derived based on the predetermined original information ,
a plurality of pieces of the predetermined original information used for the predetermined light emitting means;
The light emission pattern information to be used for light emission control by the first light emission means and the second light emission means of the light emission means in a predetermined period is derived using the different original information. Amusement machine.

Images